Sie sind auf Seite 1von 552

06/09/13 18:14:24 32SWA600_001

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it
is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all versions. Therefore, you may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not
on your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Although this manual is applicable to both right-hand and left-hand drive models, the illustrations contained in this
manual mainly refer to the left-hand drive models.
This illustrations of vehicles with diesel engine are noted by Diesel model.
06/09/13 18:14:34 32SWA600_002

Introduction

Congratulations! Your selection was a wise investment. It will give you years As you read this manual, you will
of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
(On German type)
Several other booklets explain the warranties that protect your new vehicle. 1. Mounting the front licence plate:
Read the Service Book/warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the Mount the front licence plate to
coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities. the provided holder taking care
that the upper edge of the licence
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual or plate does not project above the
the separate service information booklet helps to keep your driving trouble- upper surface of the bumper.
free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs
maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in 2. Mounting the rear licence plate:
servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated Mount the rear licence plate to the
to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and back of the vehicle so that its
concerns. lower edge is flush with the lower
end of the surface provided for
Best wishes and happy motoring. mounting.

Symbols on labels attached to your vehicle are to remind you to


read this owner’s manual for proper and safe operation of your vehicle.

i
06/09/13 18:14:44 32SWA600_003

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.

ii
06/09/13 18:14:49 32SWA600_004

Important Handling Information

Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on paved roads. Higher
ground clearance has many advantages for off-road driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
centre of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 350 of this manual and the
Off-road Guidelines section on page 393 . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly might result in loss of control or an
accident.

In many countries, the law prohibits off-road driving, e.g. driving in forests, trailblazing, etc. Please check your local
laws and regulations before commencing any off-road driving activity.

iii
06/09/13 18:14:52 32SWA600_005
06/09/13 18:15:06 32SWA600_006

Contents
Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.
Your Vehicle at a Glance........... 2 Before Driving .................... 331 Appearance Care ................. 463
What fuel to use, how to break-in Tips on cleaning and protecting
Driver and Passenger Safety ..... 9 your new vehicle, and how to load your vehicle.
Important information about the luggage and other cargo.
proper use and care of your Taking Care of the
vehicle’s seat belts, an overview of Driving ............................... 349 Unexpected ........................ 471
the supplemental restraint system, The proper way to start the engine, This section covers several
and valuable information on how shift the transmission, and park; problems motorists sometimes
to protect children with child plus what you need to know if experience, and details how to
restraints. you’re planning to tow a trailer. handle them.

Instruments and Controls ...... 75 Maintenance ....................... 397 Technical Information.......... 523
Explains the purpose of each The maintenance schedule shows ID numbers, dimensions,
instrument panel indicator, you when you need to take your capacities, and technical
message and symbol on the multi- vehicle to the dealer. There is also information.
information display and gauge, a list of things to check and
and how to use the controls on the instructions on how to check them. Index ................................. 537
dashboard and steering column.

Features ............................. 227


How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system/climate
control system, the audio system,
and other convenience features.

1
06/09/13 18:15:13 32SWA600_007

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Left-hand drive type


INFORMATION DISPLAY (P.100) SUNSHADE SWITCH*
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY* (P.210)
(P.104) CLOCK* (P.277)
PASSENGER’S
DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG FRONT AIRBAG
(P.14, 32) (P.14, 32)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.212)

POWER DOOR LOCK


MASTER SWITCH
(P.178) HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.171)
POWER WINDOW AUDIO SYSTEM*
SWITCHES (P.245)
(P.208)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS*
FUEL FILL DOOR CLIMATE CONTROL
RELEASE HANDLE SYSTEM*
(P.333) (P.228, 235)
MANUAL
BONNET RELEASE TRANSMISSION
HANDLE (P.354)
(P.335) AUTOMATIC
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK* (P.275) ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET TRANSMISSION
(P.218) (P.358)
Vehicle without navigation system is shown.

* : If equipped
2
06/09/13 18:15:20 32SWA600_008

Your Vehicle at a Glance

On vehicles without navigation system


Left-hand drive type
INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSCREEN WIPERS/WASHERS (P.160)
BRIGHTNESS HEADLIGHT WASHERS*2 (P.161)
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS (P.170)
FRONT FOG LIGHTS*2/REAR
FOG LIGHT (P.164, 167, 166)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
REMOTE AUDIO (P.171)
CONTROLS
(P.274)
CRUISE CONTROL
VEHICLE STABILITY BUTTONS*2
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM (P.282)
OFF SWITCH/HEADLIGHT
ADJUSTER*2
(P.379/173)
REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
VSA SYSTEM OFF (P.171/213)
SWITCH*3
(P.379)
HORN*1
ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM TILT/TELESCOPIC PARKING SENSOR
(AFS) OFF SWITCH*2 ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM BUTTON
(P.169) (P.174) (P.303)

*1 : To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
*2 : If equipped
*3 : On vehicles with headlight adjuster
3
06/09/13 18:15:29 32SWA600_009

Your Vehicle at a Glance

On vehicles with navigation system


Left-hand drive type HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS (P.164) INSTRUMENT PANEL
REAR FOG LIGHT/FRONT FOG LIGHTS*2 (P.166, 167) BRIGHTNESS (P.170) HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.171)
WINDSCREEN
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.160)
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL HEADLIGHT WASHERS*2
BUTTONS*2 (P.161)
(P.274)
AUDIO SYSTEM*3
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM REAR WINDOW
OFF SWITCH DEMISTER/HEATED
(P.379) MIRROR BUTTON
(P.171/213)
CMBS OFF SWITCH*2
(P.371)
PARKING SENSOR
ADAPTIVE FRONT SYSTEM BUTTON (P.303)
LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)
OFF SWITCH*2 (P.169) CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS*2 (P.282)
*1
HORN ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
VOICE CONTROL SYSTEM BUTTONS*2 (P.285)
BUTTONS*3 HANDS-FREE TILT/TELESCOPIC DISTANCE
TELEPHONE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT BUTTON*2 MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS*2 (P.310) (P.174) (P.296) BUTTONS*2 (P.105)

*1 : To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
*2 : If equipped
*3 : Refer to the navigation system manual.
4
06/09/13 18:15:37 32SWA600_010

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Right-hand drive type SUNSHADE SWITCH* INFORMATION DISPLAY (P.100)


(P.210) MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY*
HAZARD WARNING (P.104)
BUTTON MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.171) (P.212)

PASSENGER’S POWER DOOR LOCK


FRONT AIRBAG MASTER SWITCH
(P.14, 32) (P.178)

POWER WINDOW
CLOCK* SWITCHES
(P.277) (P.208)
AUDIO SYSTEM* FUEL FILL DOOR
(P.245) RELEASE HANDLE
HEATING/COOLING (P.333)
CONTROLS*
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM* BONNET RELEASE
(P.228, 235) HANDLE
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.335)
(P.354)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.358)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK* (P.275) ACCESSORY POWER DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG
Vehicle without navigation system is shown. SOCKET (P.218) (P.14, 32)

* : If equipped
5
06/09/13 18:15:45 32SWA600_011

Your Vehicle at a Glance

On vehicles without navigation system


Right-hand drive type
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS INSTRUMENT PANEL
REAR FOG LIGHT/ BRIGHTNESS
HORN*1 WINDSCREEN
FRONT FOG LIGHTS*2 (P.170)
(P.164, 166, 167) WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.160)
HAZARD WARNING HEADLIGHT
BUTTON WASHERS*2
(P.171) (P.161)

VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH/
REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/ HEADLIGHT
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON ADJUSTER*2
(P.171/213) (P.379/173)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS*2 (P.282)

ADAPTIVE FRONT
PARKING SENSOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
SYSTEM BUTTON (AFS) OFF SWITCH*2
(P.303) (P.169)
REMOTE AUDIO TILT/TELESCOPIC VSA SYSTEM OFF
CONTROLS ADJUSTMENT SWITCH*3 (P.379)
(P.274) (P.174) Vehicle without navigation system is shown.

*1 : To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
*2 : If equipped
*3 : On vehicles with headlight adjuster
6
06/09/13 18:15:53 32SWA600_012

Your Vehicle at a Glance

On vehicles with navigation system

Right-hand drive type


INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSCREEN WIPERS/WASHERS (P.160)
HAZARD WARNING BRIGHTNESS (P.170) HEADLIGHT WASHERS*2 (P.161)
BUTTON (P.171)

HEADLIGHTS/ VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST


TURN SIGNALS (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.164) (P.379)
REAR FOG LAMP/
FRONT FOG LAMPS*2
(P.106, 167) ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)
OFF SWITCH*2
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL (P.169)
BUTTONS*2 (P.274)

REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/


HEATED MIRROR BUTTON CMBS OFF SWITCH*2
(P.171/213) (P.371)
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS*2
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM (P.282)
BUTTON(P.303) ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS*3 HORN*2 SYSTEM BUTTONS*2 (P.285)
TILT/TELESCOPIC DISTANCE BUTTON*2 MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS*2
HANDS FREE TELEPHONE ADJUSTMENT
BUTTONS*2 (P.310) (P.296) (P.105)
(P.174)

*1 : To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
*2 : If equipped
*3 : Refer to the navigation system manual.
7
06/09/13 18:15:55 32SWA600_013

8
06/09/13 18:16:00 32SWA600_014

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 25 If You Must Drive with Several
information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Children .................................... 44
yourself and your passengers. It Tensioners ................................ 27 If a Child Requires Close
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt e-pretensioners ............ 28 Attention ................................... 44
explains how your airbags work. And Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 29 Additional Safety Precautions .... 44
it tells you how to properly restrain Additional Information About Protecting Infants and Small
infants and children in your vehicle. Your Airbags ............................ 31 Children .................................... 46
Airbag System Components ....... 31 Protecting Infants ........................ 46
Important Safety Precautions ........ 10 How Your Front Airbags Protecting Small Children .......... 48
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features...... 11 Work.......................................... 32 Selecting a Child Restraint
Seat Belts ...................................... 12 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 34 System ........................................... 49
Airbags .......................................... 14 How Your Side Curtain Installing a Child Restraint
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 16 Airbags Work ........................... 34 System....................................... 51
1. Close the Doors ....................... 16 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 35 Child Restraint System for EU
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 17 Airbag Service .............................. 37 Countries .................................. 52
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 18 Additional Safety Precautions .... 37 With the Lower Anchorages ..... 54
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 18 Protecting Children − General With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 59
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Guidelines ................................. 39 With a Tether ............................... 64
Belts ...................................... 19 All Children Must Be Protecting Larger Children ............ 67
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Restrained ................................ 39 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 68
Position ................................. 21 All Children Should Sit in a Using a Booster Seat ................... 68
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 22 Back Seat .................................. 40 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Additional Safety Precautions .... 22 The Passenger’s Front Airbag Front .......................................... 70
Additional Information About Your Poses Serious Risks................. 40 Additional Safety Precautions .... 71
Seat Belts .................................. 24 The Side Airbag Poses Serious Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 72
Seat Belt System Components ... 24 Risks .......................................... 43 Safety Labels .................................... 73

Driver and Passenger Safety 9


06/09/13 18:16:10 32SWA600_015

Important Safety Precautions

You’ll find many safety booster seat (see pages 39 − 71 ). Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. Be Aware of Airbag Hazards crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page While airbags can save lives, they the higher the speed, the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the can cause serious or fatal injuries to risk, but serious injuries can also
most important. occupants who sit too close to them, occur at lower speeds. Never drive
or are not properly restrained. faster than is safe for current
Always Wear Your Seat Belt Infants, young children, and short conditions, regardless of the
A seat belt is your best protection in adults are at the greatest risk. Be maximum speed posted.
all types of collisions. Airbags are sure to follow all instructions and
designed to supplement seat belts, warnings in this manual. Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
not replace them. So even though Condition
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, Don’t Drink and Drive Having a tyre blowout or a
make sure you and your passengers Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even mechanical failure can be extremely
always wear your seat belts, and one drink can reduce your ability to hazardous. To reduce the possibility
wear them properly (see page 19 ). respond to changing conditions, and of such problems, check your tyre
your reaction time gets worse with pressures and condition frequently,
Restrain All Children every additional drink. So don’t drink and perform all regularly scheduled
Children age 12 and under should and drive, and don’t let your friends maintenance (see page 399 , and for
ride properly restrained in a back drink and drive, either. EU countries, see the Service Book/
seat, not the front seat. Infants and separate service information booklet
small children should be restrained that came with your vehicle).
in a child restraint system. Larger
children should use a booster seat
and a lap/shoulder belt until they
can use the belt properly without a

10 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:16:17 32SWA600_016

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many


(3) (4) (9) (9) features that work together to
(1) protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(11)
Some features do not require any
(7) action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
(5) compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
(2) seat belts in a crash.
(6)
(8) However, you and your passengers
(10) can’t take full advantage of these
(1) Safety Cage features unless you remain sitting in
(2) Crush Zones a proper position and always wear
(11) (3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(5) Collapsible Steering Column features can contribute to injuries if
(2) (6) Seat Belts they are not used properly.
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags The following pages explain how you
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/ can take an active role in protecting
* : On vehicles with collision Seat Belt e-pretensioners* yourself and your passengers.
mitigation brake system (CMBS) (11) Outer Lap Tensioners

Driver and Passenger Safety 11


06/09/13 18:16:28 32SWA600_017

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts In most European Countries there is When properly worn, seat belts:
Your vehicle is equipped with seat a law covering the use of seat belts.
belts in all seating positions. Please take time to familiarize Keep you connected to the vehicle
yourself with the legal requirements so you can take advantage of the
Your seat belt system also includes of the countries in which you will vehicle’s built-in safety features.
an indicator on the instrument panel drive.
and a beeper to remind you and your Help protect you in almost every
passengers to fasten your seat belts. type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
Why Wear Seat Belts Not wearing a seat belt rollovers.
Seat belts are the single most properly increases the
effective safety device for adults and chance of serious injury or Help keep you from being thrown
larger children. (Infants and smaller death in a crash, even though against the inside of the vehicle
children must be properly restrained your vehicle has airbags. and against other occupants.
in child restraint systems.)
Be sure you and your Keep you from being thrown out
Not wearing a seat belt properly passengers always wear seat of the vehicle.
increases the chance of serious belts and wear them properly.
injury or death in a crash, even Help keep you in a good position
though your vehicle has airbags. should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.

12 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:16:35 32SWA600_018

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Of course, seat belts cannot WARNING:


completely protect you in every Seat belts are designed to bear upon
crash. But in most cases, seat belts the bony structure of the body, and
can reduce your risk of serious should be worn low across the front
injury. of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
What You Should Do: lap section of the belt across the
Always wear your seat belt, and abdominal area must be avoided.
make sure you wear it properly.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed. A
slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.

Belts should not be worn with straps


twisted.

Each belt assembly must only be used


by one occupant; it is dangerous to
put a belt around a child being carried
on the occupant’s lap.

Driver and Passenger Safety 13


06/09/13 18:16:42 32SWA600_019

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
restraint system (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger,
chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear
passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 34 for more seating positions during a moderate
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags to severe side impact or rollover (see
32 for more information on how work). page 34 for more information on how
your front airbags work). your side curtain airbags work).

14 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:16:48 32SWA600_020

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
impacts, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.


To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety 15


06/09/13 18:16:59 32SWA600_021

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction On vehicles with information display On vehicles with multi-information


The following pages provide display
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.

See pages 39 − 45 for important


guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.

1.Close the Doors Your vehicle has a door and tailgate


After everyone has entered the open monitor on the instrument Your vehicle has a door and tailgate
vehicle, be sure the doors and the panel to indicate when a specific open monitor display on the multi-
tailgate are closed. door or the tailgate is not tightly information display to indicate when
closed. a specific door or the tailgate is not
tightly closed.
See page 95 for how the door and
tailgate open monitor works. The above illustration shows that all
doors and the tailgate are open.

See page 116 for how the monitor


display works.

16 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:17:07 32SWA600_022

Protecting Adults and Teens

2.Adjust the Front Seats In addition to adjusting the seat, you


can adjust the steering wheel up and
down, and in and out (see page 174 ). Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
If you cannot get far enough away injury or death if the front
from the steering wheel and still airbags inflate.
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some Always sit as far back from
type of adaptive equipment may help. the front airbags as possible.

Once your manual seat is adjusted


correctly, rock it back and forth to
make sure it is locked into position.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the See page 189 for how to adjust the
rear as possible while allowing you to front seats.
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steering


wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.

Driver and Passenger Safety 17


06/09/13 18:17:16 32SWA600_023

Protecting Adults and Teens

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs 4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too


far can result in serious injury
or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an


upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.

Reclining a seat-back so that the


shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
comfortable, upright position, the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against
leaving ample space between your of sliding under the belt in a crash the centre of the restraint.
chest and the airbag cover in the and being seriously injured. The
centre of the steering wheel. farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers adjust their head
greater the risk of injury. restraints properly as well. Taller
Passengers with adjustable seat- persons should adjust their restraint
backs should also adjust their seat- See page 188 for how to adjust the as high as possible.
back to a comfortable, upright seat-backs.
position.

18 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:17:23 32SWA600_024

Protecting Adults and Teens

When a passenger is seated in the Properly adjusted head restraints 5.Fasten and Position the Seat
rear centre seating position, make will help protect occupants from Belts
sure the centre head restraint is whiplash and other crash injuries. Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
adjusted to its highest position. then tug on the belt to make sure the
See page 192 for how to adjust the belt is securely latched. Check that
head restraints. the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
Improperly positioning head injuries in a crash.
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be The seat belt in the centre position
seriously injured in a crash. of the back seat can be unlatched
and retracted to allow the back seat
Make sure head restraints are to be folded up or down. This seat
in place and positioned belt should be latched whenever the
properly before driving. seat-back is in an upright position.
See page 199 for how to unlatch and
relatch the seat belt.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 19


06/09/13 18:17:30 32SWA600_025

Protecting Adults and Teens

If necessary, pull up on the belt again If the seat belt touches or crosses
to remove any slack, then check that your neck, or if it crosses your arm
the belt rests across the centre of instead of your shoulder, you need to
your chest and over your shoulder. adjust the seat belt anchor height.

This spreads the forces of a crash RELEASE BUTTON


over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

Improperly positioning the


seat belts can cause serious
Position the lap part of the belt as injury or death in a crash.
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of Make sure all seat belts are
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. properly positioned before
This lets your strong pelvic bones driving. The front seats have adjustable seat
take the force of a crash and reduces belt anchors. To adjust the height of
the chance of internal injuries. an anchor, press and hold the release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).

20 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:17:39 32SWA600_026

Protecting Adults and Teens

Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting In a front passenger leans sideways
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position and his head is in the deployment
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted path of the side airbag, an inflating
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and put on seat belts, it is side airbag can strike the passenger
very important that they continue to with enough force to very seriously
If a seat belt does not seem to work sit upright, well back in their seats, injure him.
as it should, it may not protect the with their feet on the floor, until the
occupant in a crash. vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
No one should sit in a seat with an Sitting improperly or out of
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat Sitting improperly can increase the position can result in serious
belt that is not working properly can chance of injury during a crash. For injury or death in a crash.
result in serious injury or death. example, if an occupant slouches,
Have your dealer check the belt as lies down, turns sideways, sits Always sit upright, well back
soon as possible. forward, leans forward or sideways, in the seat, with your feet on
or puts one or both feet up, the the floor.
See page 24 for additional chance of injury during a crash is
information about your seat belts greatly increased.
and how to take care of them.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

Driver and Passenger Safety 21


06/09/13 18:17:47 32SWA600_027

Protecting Adults and Teens

Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit Additional Safety Precautions
upright and adjust the seat as far Never let passengers ride in the
back as possible while allowing full luggage area or on top of a folded-
control of the vehicle. When riding down back seat. If they do, they
as a front passenger, adjust the seat could be very seriously injured in a
as far back as possible. crash.

This will reduce the risk of injuries Passengers should not stand up or
to both you and your unborn child change seats while the vehicle is
that can be caused by a crash or an moving. A passenger who is not
inflating front airbag. wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
Each time you have a checkup, ask against the inside of the vehicle,
your doctor if it’s okay for you to against other occupants, or out of
If you are pregnant, the best way to drive. the vehicle.
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a Two people should never use the
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, same seat belt. If they do, they
and keep the lap part of the belt as could be very seriously injured in a
low as possible across the hips. crash.

22 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:17:52 32SWA600_028

Protecting Adults and Teens

Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on


belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper
reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
the seat belt and increase the propelled inside the vehicle and
chance of serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or


between yourself and a front near a door. If a side airbag or a
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object
a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.

Keep your hands and arms away Do not put a coat hanger or hard
from the airbag covers. If your objects on a coat hook. This could
hands or arms are close to an result in injuries if your side
airbag cover, they could be injured curtain airbags inflate.
if the airbag inflates.

Driver and Passenger Safety 23


06/09/13 18:18:01 32SWA600_029

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components If you turn the ignition switch to the When no one is sitting in the front
Your seat belt system includes lap/ ON (II) position before your seat passenger’s seat, or a child or small
shoulder belts in all five seating belt is fastened, the beeper will adult is riding there, the indicator
positions. The front seat belts are sound and the indicator will flash. If should not come on and the beeper
also equipped with automatic seat your seat belt is not fastened before should not sound.
belt tensioners. the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on. You will also see a symbol ‘‘ ’’
On vehicles with collision mitigation (for a driver)/‘‘ ’’ (for a front
brake system (CMBS), the front seat If a front passenger does not fasten passenger), or a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
belts are also equipped with seat belt their seat belt, the indicator will BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
e-pretensioners. come on about 6 seconds after the SEAT BELT’’ message with a
ignition switch is turned to the ON symbol on the multi-information
The seat belt system (II) position. display to remind you and your
includes an indicator on the passengers to fasten your seat belts.
instrument panel and a beeper to If either the driver or a front
remind you and your passengers to passenger does not fasten their seat
fasten your seat belts. belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
This system monitors the seat belts again at regular intervals.
in all seating positions.

24 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:18:11 32SWA600_030

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

The seat belt system also monitors Have your vehicle checked by a Lap/Shoulder Belt
the seat belt use of all three rear dealer if the indicator comes on or
seating positions according to each the beeper sounds when there is no SHOULDER UPPER
PORTION SEAT
seat belt lockable retractor activation. front passenger or there are no BELT
The multi-information display or the objects on the front seat. ANCHOR
information display will show you the
seat belt use on the rear seat (see LATCH
page 115 on vehicles with multi- PLATE
information display, and page 83 on
vehicles with information display).

The front passenger’s seat belt use BUCKLE


monitoring system uses the occupant LAP PORTION
detection sensor in the front
passenger’s seat. The system may The lap and shoulder belt goes over
not work properly under these your shoulder, across your chest,
conditions: and across your hips.

You place heavy items on the front To fasten the belt, insert the latch
passenger’s seat. plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
You place a cushion on the front latched (see page 19 for how to
passenger’s seat. properly position the belt).

The front passenger is not sitting


properly. CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 25


06/09/13 18:18:18 32SWA600_031

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

To unlock the belt, press the red The seat belts in all rear seating
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide positions have a lockable retractor
the belt across your body so that it that must be activated to secure a DETACHABLE SEAT BELT
retracts completely. After exiting the child restraint (see page 59 ).
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the If the shoulder part of the belt is
door. pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
All seat belts have an emergency retract, but it will not allow the
locking retractor. In normal driving, passenger to move freely.
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some To deactivate the lockable retractor,
tension on the belt. During a collision unlatch the buckle and let the seat
or sudden stop, the retractor belt fully retract. To refasten the
automatically locks the belt to help seat belt, pull it out only as far as The lap/shoulder belt in the centre
restrain your body. needed. seating position on the rear seat is
equipped with a detachable seat belt
that has two parts: a small latch plate
and an anchor buckle.

The detachable seat belt should


normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 199 .

26 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:18:27 32SWA600_032

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to On vehicles with collision mitigation
activate in any collision severe brake system (CMBS)
SEAT BELT TENSIONER enough to cause the front airbags to If there is no passenger on the front
deploy, or if a sensor detects your passenger’s seat and the seat belt is
vehicle is about to roll over (see page not fastened, the front passenger’s
35 ). automatic seat belt tensioner will not
be activated.
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the The SRS indicator will
tensioner on that side of the vehicle come on if there is a
will also deploy. problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page 35 ).
OUTER LAP TENSIONER The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
For added protection, the front seat airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
belts are equipped with automatic airbags would not be needed, but the
seat belt tensioners. When activated, additional restraint could be helpful.
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and When the tensioners are activated,
a front passenger in position. the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.

If the front seat belt tensioners ever


activate, they must be replaced as
the belts will no longer retract
properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety 27


06/09/13 18:18:35 32SWA600_033

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt e-pretensioners In addition, the e-pretensioners work The e-pretensioners do not activate
in combination with the brake pedal when the seat belts are not worn or
assist function (see page 365 ). when the vehicle stability assist
(VSA) off indicator on the
If your vehicle gets too close to the instrument panel is on.
vehicle ahead of it in your lane, the
driver’s e-pretensioner slightly If the automatic seat belt tensioners
retracts the seat belt to alert the are activated by a collision, both
driver of the approaching vehicle. If front seat belts and all related
a collision with the vehicle in front of components must be replaced (see
you is likely, the e-pretensioners on page 29 ). If only the
both front seats retract the seat belts e-pretensioners were activated, no
with enough force to properly components need to be replaced.
restrain you and your front
On vehicles with collision mitigation passenger. After they activate, the
brake system (CMBS) e-pretensioners release the retracted
For added safety, the front seat belts seat belts.
are equipped with the
e-pretensioners that work in To get the full benefit of the
combination with the collision e-pretensioners, you and your front
mitigation brake system (CMBS) to passenger must sit normally in your
maximize the restraining ability of seats and wear your seat belts
the belts. For more information on properly (see page 21 ).
the CMBS, see page 368 .

28 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:18:43 32SWA600_034

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash, WARNING: It is essential to replace
For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A the entire assembly after it has been
condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a worn in a severe impact even if damage
crash may not provide the same level to the assembly is not obvious.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for of protection in a subsequent crash.
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check WARNING: Care should be taken to
that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the avoid contamination of the webbing with
the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace polishes, oils and chemicals, and
not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a safely be carried out using mild soap and
469 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced. water. The belt should be replaced if
condition or working properly will webbing becomes frayed, contaminated
not provide good protection and or damaged.
should be replaced as soon as
possible.

WARNING: No modifications or
additions should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted to remove
slack.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 29


06/09/13 18:18:51 32SWA600_035

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Anchorage Points (Rear Seat)


When replacing the seat belts, make
Not checking or maintaining certain to use the anchorage points
seat belts can result in shown in the illustrations.
serious injury or death if the
seat belts do not work (Front Seat)
properly when needed.

Check your seat belts


regularly and have any
problem corrected as soon as
possible.

The rear seat has three lap/shoulder


belts.

30 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:19:02 32SWA600_036

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components Automatic front seat belt An indicator on the instrument
Your airbag system includes: tensioners (see page 27 ). panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
Two SRS (supplemental restraint On vehicles with CMBS sensors, or seat belt tensioners
system) front airbags. The driver’s Front seat belt e-pretensioners (see page 35 ).
airbag is stored in the centre of (see page 28 ).
the steering wheel; the front On vehicles with CMBS
passenger’s airbag is stored in the Sensors that can detect a This indicator also alerts you to a
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS moderate to severe front impact, possible problem with the seat belt
AIRBAG’’ (see page 32 ). side impact, or a rollover. e-pretensioners.

Two side airbags, one for the Sensors that can detect whether A rollover sensor that can detect if
driver and one for a front the driver’s seat belt and a front your vehicle is about to roll over
passenger. The airbags are stored passenger’s seat belt is latched or and signal the control unit to
in the outer edges of the seat- unlatched (see page 19 ). deploy both side curtain airbags
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE and front seat belt tensioners (see
AIRBAG’’ (see page 34 ). A sophisticated electronic system page 35 ).
that continually monitors and
Two side curtain airbags, one for records information about the Emergency backup power in case
each side of the vehicle. The sensors, the control unit, the your vehicle’s electrical system is
airbags are stored in the ceiling airbag activators, the seat belt disconnected in a crash.
above the side windows. The front tensioners, and driver and front
and rear pillars on both sides are passenger seat belt use when the
marked ‘‘SIDE CURTAIN ignition switch is in the ON (II)
AIRBAG’’ (see page 34 ). position.

Driver and Passenger Safety 31


06/09/13 18:19:09 32SWA600_037

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally


inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of a


collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.

32 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:19:17 32SWA600_038

Additional Information About Your Airbags

The total time for inflation and Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
fast that most occupants are not airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
aware that the airbags deployed until inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
they see them lying in their laps. sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is
After a crash, you may see what wearing a seat belt or not.
looks like smoke. This is actually In a more severe crash, both stages
powder from the airbag’s surface. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
Although the powder is not harmful, the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
people with respiratory problems lower threshold, because the
may experience some temporary In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of ignite first, then the second stage protection.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite a split second later. This
so. provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.

Driver and Passenger Safety 33


06/09/13 18:19:26 32SWA600_039

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Airbags Work Only one airbag will deploy during a How Your Side Curtain Airbags
side impact. If the impact is on the Work
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
is no passenger.

To get the best protection from the


side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.

If a front seat passenger leans


sideways and his head is in the
deployment path of the side airbag,
If you ever have a moderate to he can be seriously injured by an
severe side impact, sensors will inflating side airbag. An inflating In a Side Impact
detect rapid acceleration and signal side airbag can strike the child with In a moderate to severe side impact,
the control unit to instantly inflate enough force to kill or very seriously sensors will detect rapid acceleration
either the driver’s or the passenger’s injure a child. For the information of and signal the control unit to
side airbag and activate the seat belt the side airbags hazards, see pages instantly inflate the side curtain
tensioner. 43 and 67 . airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.

34 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:19:35 32SWA600_040

Additional Information About Your Airbags

If the impact is on the passenger’s To get the best protection from the How the SRS Indicator Works
side, the passenger’s side curtain side curtain airbags, occupants The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no should wear their seat belts and sit you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. upright and well back in their seats. with your airbags, sensors, or seat
belt tensioners.
In a Rollover
If the rollover sensor detects your On vehicles with CMBS
vehicle is about to roll over, it signals This indicator also alerts you to a
the control unit, which immediately possible problem with the seat belt
deploys both side curtain airbags and e-pretensioners.
activates both front seat belt
tensioners. When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
The airbag on the passenger’s side comes on briefly then goes off. This
will deploy, and the seat belt tells you the system is working
tensioner will activate, even if there properly.
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 35


06/09/13 18:19:42 32SWA600_041

Additional Information About Your Airbags

If the indicator comes on at any On vehicles with multi-information If you see any of these indications,
other time, or does not come on at all, display the airbags and seat belt tensioners
you should have the system checked You will also see the symbol may not work properly when you
by your dealer. For example: ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a need them.
‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the
If the SRS indicator does not come multi-information display (see page
on after you turn the ignition 125 ).
switch to the ON (II) position. Ignoring the SRS indicator
can result in serious injury or
If the indicator stays on after the death if the airbag systems or
engine starts. tensioners do not work
properly.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive. Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you
to a possible problem.

36 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:19:50 32SWA600_042

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag Service Handling is allowed by trained Additional Safety Precautions


Your airbag systems and automatic personnel only. It is prohibited to Do not attempt to deactivate your
seat belt tensioners are virtually remove the airbag unit/belt- airbags. Together, airbags and
maintenance free, and there are no tensioner from the vehicle. In case of seat belts provide the best
parts you can safely service. malfunction, shutdown or after protection.
However, you must have your airbag inflation/belt-tensioner
vehicle serviced if: operation you have to ask a qualified Do not tamper with airbag and
shop for repair or removal. automatic seat belt tensioner
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag components or wiring for any
that has deployed must be reason. Tampering could cause
replaced along with the control the airbags and automatic seat belt
unit and other related parts. Any tensioners to deploy, possibly
seat belt tensioner that activates causing very serious injury.
must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replace


any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by your dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.

The SRS indicator alerts you to a


problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly. CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 37


06/09/13 18:19:54 32SWA600_043

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Do not expose the front seat-backs


to liquid. If water or another liquid
soaks into the seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.

Do not cover or replace front seat-


back covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.

38 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:20:03 32SWA600_044

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained


Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are
they are either unrestrained or not unrestrained or improperly
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle restrained can be seriously
accidents are the number one cause injured or killed in a crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in an approved
deaths and injuries, infants and child restraint system. A
children should be properly larger child should be
restrained when they ride in a properly restrained with a
Children depend on adults to protect vehicle. seat belt and use a booster
them. However, despite their best seat if necessary.
intentions, many adults do not know Infants and small children must be
how to properly protect child restrained in an approved child
passengers. restraint system that is properly Larger children must be restrained
secured to the vehicle (see pages with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
If you have children, or ever need to 39 − 65 ). a booster seat until the seat belt fits
drive with a child in your vehicle, be them properly (see pages 67 − 71 ).
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children. CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 39


06/09/13 18:20:10 32SWA600_045

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

In most countries, child restraint All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag
systems must meet the Seat Poses Serious Risks
specifications of the ECE 44 According to crash statistics, Front airbags have been designed to
regulation. children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to
safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this,
In many countries, the law requires back seat. It is recommended that all the passenger’s front airbag is quite
children younger than 12 years of children age 12 and under be large, and it can inflate with enough
age and less than 150 cm (60 in) in properly restrained in a back seat. force to cause very serious injuries.
height to be secured in an officially
approved and suitable child restraint Children who ride in back are less Infants
system. In those countries, officially likely to be injured by striking Never put a rearward facing child
approved and suitable child restraint interior vehicle parts during a restraint system in the front seat of a
systems must therefore be used in collision or hard braking. Also, vehicle equipped with a passenger’s
order to transport a child on any children cannot be injured by an front airbag. If the airbag inflates, it
passenger seat whatsoever. Please inflating airbag when they ride in the can hit the back of the child restraint
check your local legal requirements. back. system with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure an infant.

40 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:20:19 32SWA600_046

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94; If the passenger’s front airbag Larger Children
inflates, it can hit the rearward Children who have outgrown child
facing child restraint system with restraint systems are also at risk of
great force. The rearward facing being injured or killed by an inflating
child restraint system can be passenger’s front airbag. Whenever
dislodged or struck with enough possible, larger children should sit in
force to cause very serious injury to the back seat, in a booster seat if
the infant. needed, and be properly restrained
with a seat belt (see page 67 for
Small Children important information about
Placing a front facing child restraint protecting larger children).
DO NOT place rear-facing system in the front seat of a vehicle
child seat on this seat with equipped with a passenger’s front In all cases observe the legal
airbag. airbag can be hazardous. If the requirements of the countries in
vehicle seat is too far forward, or the which you will drive.
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY child’s head is thrown forward
can occur. during a collision, an inflating front
airbag can strike the child with
enough force to kill or very seriously
injure a small child.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 41


06/09/13 18:20:24 32SWA600_047

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

To remind you of the passenger’s As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;


front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the windscreen, on
the front passenger’s doorjamb and
on the front passenger’s sun visor.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Extreme Hazard!

DO NOT use a rearward DO NOT place rear-facing


facing child restraint on a child seat on this seat with
seat protected by an airbag in airbag.
front of it!
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY
can occur.

42 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/19 17:13:21 32SWA600_048

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

The Side Airbag Poses Serious


Risks
Side airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe side impact.
If any part of a child’s body is in the
path of a deploying airbag, an
inflating side airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a child. Leaning over the front door
can result in serious injury or
To remind you of the side airbags death if the side airbag
hazards, and that children must be inflates.
properly restrained in the back seat,
your vehicle has the safety label on Always sit upright with their
each front doorjamb. back against the seat-back.

Driver and Passenger Safety 43


06/09/13 18:20:39 32SWA600_049

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions
Children Attention Never hold an infant or child on
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put your lap. If you are not wearing a
children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front seat belt in crash, you could be
If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the thrown forward and crush the
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child against the dashboard or a
front: attention. seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat from your arms and be seriously
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a hurt or killed.
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision or a side impact, and
belt properly (see page 67 ). paying close attention to a child Never put a seat belt over yourself
distracts the driver from the and a child. During a crash, the
Move the vehicle seat as far to the important tasks of driving, placing belt could press deep into the child
rear as possible (see page 189 ). both of you at risk. and cause serious or fatal injuries.

Have the child sit upright and well If a child requires close physical Never let two children use the
back in the seat (see page 21 ). attention or frequent visual contact, same seat belt. If they do, they
we strongly recommend that another could be very seriously injured in a
Make sure the seat belt is properly adult ride with the child in the back crash.
positioned and secured (see page seat. The back seat is far safer for a
19 ). child than the front.

44 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:20:48 32SWA600_050

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

Make sure any unused seat belt WARNING: Always take the ignition Keep vehicle keys/remote
that a child can reach is buckled, key with you whenever you leave the transmitters out of the reach of
the lockable retractor is activated, vehicle alone (with other occupants). children. Even very young
and the belt is fully retracted and children learn how to unlock
locked. If a child wraps a loose Do not leave children alone in a vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
seat belt around their neck, they vehicle. Leaving children without switch, and open the tailgate,
can be seriously or fatally injured. adult supervision is illegal in some which can lead to accidental injury
(See pages 59 and 62 for how to countries, and can be very or death.
activate and deactivate the hazardous.
lockable retractor.) ‘‘Never let children kneel on seats or
For example, infants and small stand while the vehicle is in motion.
Use the childproof door locks to children left in a vehicle on a hot The violent forces created during
prevent children from opening the day can die from heatstroke. A emergency braking will cause the
rear doors. This can prevent child left alone with the key in the children to be thrown forward. The
children from accidentally falling ignition switch can accidentally set children could be seriously injured or
out (see page 181 ). the vehicle in motion, possibly killed.’’
injuring themselves or others.
WARNING: Use the main power
window switch to prevent children Lock all doors and the tailgate
from opening the windows. Using this when your vehicle is not in use.
feature will prevent children from Children who play in vehicles can
playing with the windows, which accidentally get trapped inside.
could expose them to hazards or Teach your children not to play in
distract the driver (see page 208 ). or around vehicles.

Driver and Passenger Safety 45


06/09/13 18:20:58 32SWA600_051

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants Only a rearward facing child Rearward Facing Child Restraint
restraint system provides proper System Placement
support for a baby’s head, neck and A rearward facing child restraint
back. system can be placed in any seating
position in the back seat, but not in
Two types of restraints may be used: the front. Never put a rearward
a restraint system designed facing child restraint system in the
exclusively for infants, or a front seat.
convertible restraint system used in
the rearward facing, reclining mode. For EU countries, an approved
rearward facing child restraint
For EU countries, refer to page system should be placed in any
52 for the recommended child seating position in the back seat (see
restraint system. page 52 ).
Child Restraint System Type
An infant must be properly Do not put a rearward facing child If the passenger’s front airbag
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining restraint system in a forward-facing inflates, it can hit the back of the
child restraint system until the child position. If placed facing forward, an restraint with enough force to kill or
reaches the restraint system maker’s infant could be very seriously injured seriously injure an infant.
weight or height limit for the during a frontal collision.
restraint system, and the child is at
least one year old.

46 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:21:04 32SWA600_052

Protecting Infants and Small Children

When properly installed, a rearward As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;


facing child restraint system may
prevent the driver or a front Placing a rearward facing
passenger from moving their seat as child restraint system in the
far back as recommended, or from front seat can result in
locking their seat-back in the desired serious injury or death if the
position. passenger’s front airbag
inflates.
In either situation, we strongly
recommend that you install the child Always place a rearward
restraint system directly behind the facing child restraint system DO NOT place rear-facing
front passenger seat, move the seat in the back seat, not the front. child seat on this seat with
as far forward as needed, and leave it airbag.
unoccupied. Or you may wish to get
a smaller rearward facing child DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY
restraint system. can occur.

If the passenger’s front airbag


inflates, it can hit the rearward
facing child restraint system with
great force. The rearward facing
child restraint system can be
dislodged or struck with enough
force to cause very serious injury to
the infant.

Driver and Passenger Safety 47


06/09/13 18:21:13 32SWA600_053

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small If it is necessary to put a front facing
child uses the child restraint system child restraint system in the front,
as long as possible, until the child move the vehicle seat as far to the
reaches the weight or height limit rear as possible, and be sure the
for the restraint system. child restraint system is firmly
secured to the vehicle and the child
For EU countries, refer to page is properly strapped in the restraint
52 for the recommended child system.
restraint system.

Child Restraint System Placement


We strongly recommend placing a Placing a front facing child
front facing child restraint system in restraint system in the front
a back seat, not the front. seat can result in serious
Child Restraint System Type injury or death if the front
A child who is at least one year old, Placing a front facing child restraint airbag inflates.
and who fits within the child system in the front seat of a vehicle
restraint system maker’s weight and equipped with a passenger’s airbag If you must place a front
height limits, should be restrained in can be hazardous. If the vehicle seat facing child restraint system
a front facing, upright child restraint is too far forward, or the child’s head in front, move the vehicle
system. is thrown forward during a collision, seat as far back as possible,
an inflating airbag can strike the and properly restrain the
Of the different restraint systems child with enough force to cause child.
available, we recommend those that very serious or fatal injuries.
have a five-point harness system as
shown.

48 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:21:22 32SWA600_054

Selecting a Child Restraint System

When buying a child restraint We also recommend selecting a Whatever type of child restraint you
system, you need to choose either a lower anchorages system-compatible choose, to provide proper protection,
conventional child restraint system, child restraint system with a rigid, a child restraint system should meet
or one designed for use with the rather than a flexible, anchor (see three requirements:
lower anchorages and tethers. page 54 ).
1. The child restraint system should
Conventional child restraint systems In EU countries, a child restraint meet safety standards. In most
must be secured to a vehicle with a system with a flexible anchor is not countries, child restraint systems
seat belt, whereas lower anchorages available. must meet the specifications of
system-compatible child restraint the ECE 44 regulation. Look for
systems are secured by attaching the In seating positions and vehicles not the approval mark on the system
restraint to hardware built into each equipped with lower anchorages and the manufacturer’s statement
rear seating position in the back seat. system, a lower anchorages system- of compliance on the box.
compatible child restraint system
Since lower anchorages system- can be installed using a seat belt. The manufacturer of the vehicle
compatible child restraint systems does not assume any responsibility
are easier to install and reduce the for damage which would be caused
possibility of improper installation, by a defect inherent in the
we recommend selecting this style. recommended child restraint system.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 49


06/09/13 18:21:27 32SWA600_055

Selecting a Child Restraint System

2. The child restraint system should Before purchasing a conventional


be of the proper type and size to fit child restraint system, or using a
the child. previously purchased one, we
Rearward facing for infants, front recommend that you test the
facing for small children. restraint system in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
Make sure the restraint system fits where the child restraint system will
your child. Check the manufacturer’s be used.
instructions and labels for height and
weight limits. For EU countries, refer to page
52 for the recommended child
3. The child restraint system should restraint system.
fit the vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.

50 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:21:36 32SWA600_056

Installing a Child Restraint System

After selecting a proper child 2. Make sure the child restraint 3. Secure the child in the child
restraint system and a good place to system is firmly secured. After restraint system. Make sure the
install the restraint system, there are installing a child restraint system, child is properly strapped in the
three main steps in installing the push and pull the restraint system child restraint system according to
restraint system: forward and from side-to-side to the child restraint system maker’s
verify that it is secure. instructions. A child who is not
1. Properly secure the child restraint properly secured in a child
system to the vehicle. All child A child restraint system secured restraint system can be seriously
restraint systems must be secured with a seat belt should be installed as injured in a crash.
to the vehicle with the lap part of a firmly as possible. However, it does
lap/shoulder belt or with the lower not need to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some The following pages provide the
anchorages system. A child whose side-to-side movement can be recommended child restraint
restraint system is not properly expected and should not reduce the systems for EU countries and
secured to the vehicle can be child restraint system’s effectiveness. guidelines on how to properly install
endangered in a crash. a child restraint system. A front
If the child restraint system is not facing child restraint system is used
Except for European models secure, try installing it in a different in all examples, but the instructions
If you use a lap/shoulder belt seating position, or use a different are the same for a rearward facing
without a lockable retractor, be sure style of child restraint system that child restraint system.
you install a locking clip on the seat can be firmly secured.
belt (see page 63 ).
For EU countries, refer to page
52 for the recommended child
restraint system.

Driver and Passenger Safety 51


06/09/13 18:21:49 32SWA600_057

Installing a Child Restraint System

Child Restraint System for EU Countries


Various types of child restraint systems are available. Not all types are suitable for your vehicle. Please refer to the
table below to select which category of child restraint system can be used on each seating position.
Seating Position
Mass Group Front passenger Rear passenger
Outboard Centre
group 0 Up to 10 kg X U*2 Honda BABY-SAFE
group 0+ Up to 13 kg X IL (Honda BABY-SAFE IL (Honda BABY-SAFE ISO
ISO FIX) or U*2 FIX) or Honda BABY-SAFE
group I 9 kg to 18 kg Honda LORD*1 IUF (Size class A, B1, B) IUF (Size class A, B1, B) or
or U*2 Honda LOAD
group II 15 kg to 25 kg Honda KID*1 U*2 Honda KID
group III 22 kg to 36 kg Honda KID*1 U*2 Honda KID
IL: Suitable for particular ISO FIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in this table.
IUF: Suitable for front facing ISO FIX child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass
group.
For group I, the front facing genuine Honda ISO FIX child restraint system is available from your dealer.
U: Suitable for ‘‘universal’’ category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.
X: Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
*1: Move the front seat to its rearmost position.
*2: Adjust the front seat forward to 30 mm (3 notches) from its rearmost position.

A size class is specified for some child restraint systems. Make sure to check the size class as indicated on the
manufacturer’s instructions, package, and labels of the child restraint.
The particular child restraints in the above table are Honda Genuine Parts. They are available from your dealer.
For a correct installation, please refer to the Child Restraint Instruction Manual.
52 Driver and Passenger Safety
06/11/27 16:23:24 32SWA600_058

Installing a Child Restraint System

Your vehicle has the manual Your vehicle is equipped with lower
adjustable rear seat. To install a child anchorages at each seating position
restraint system in any seating on the rear seat. These anchorages
position on the rear seat, slide the are only to be used with a child
rear seat as far back as it can go. restraint system designed to be
attached to the lower anchorages.
Refer to page 54 for how to install a
child restraint system to the lower
The use of any child restraint anchorages.
system which is not suitable
for your vehicles would not
properly secure the infant or
child who could therefore be
killed or seriously injured.

Driver and Passenger Safety 53


06/09/13 18:22:03 32SWA600_059

Installing a Child Restraint System

Installing a Child Restraint BUTTON LOWER ANCHORAGES Using the Outer Lower Anchorages
System with the Lower for CENTRE POSITION
Anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with lower
anchorages at the rear seats to
secure a child restraint system in any
seating position: one in each outer
seating position, or one in the centre.

The five lower anchorages are


located between the seat-back and LOWER
ANCHORAGES for
seat bottom, and are to be used only OUTER POSITION
with a child restraint system OUTER LOWER ANCHORAGES
designed for use with the lower position, use the centre lower
anchorages. anchorages as shown in the To install a child restraint system
illustration. To install a child designed to be attached to the lower
The location of each lower restraint system in either outer anchorages in either of the rear
anchorage is indicated by a small seating position, use the outer lower outer seats:
button above the anchorage point. anchorages. You can install up to two
child restraint systems at a time 1. Store the seat belt buckle or
For EU countries, refer to page using the outer lower anchorages. tongue in the storage pockets.
52 for the recommended child
restraint system. Do not attach two child restraint
system connectors to a single lower
When you install a child restraint anchorage at a time.
system in the rear centre seating

54 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:22:12 32SWA600_060

Installing a Child Restraint System

2. Make sure there are no objects LOWER ANCHORAGE Rigid type


near the anchorages that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child restraint system
and the anchorages.

3. On some child restraint systems


You may use optional guide-cups
that came with your child restraint
system to install it to the lower
anchorages without damaging the
seat surface. GUIDE-CUP

Attach the guide-cups to the 4. Place the child restraint system on


lower anchorages as shown in the vehicle seat, then attach the
the illustration. child restraint system to the lower
anchorages according to the child
When using the guide-cups, restraint system maker’s
always follow the child restraint instructions.
system manufacturer’s
instructions. Some child restraint systems
designed for use with lower
anchorages have a rigid-type
connector as shown above.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 55


06/09/13 18:22:20 32SWA600_061

Installing a Child Restraint System

Flexible type 5. Whatever type you have, follow ATTACHING CLIP


the child restraint system maker’s
instructions for adjusting or
tightening the fit.

Flexible type child restraint


system is available in some
countries. In EU countries, this
type is not available.

6. Set the head restraint to its


highest position. TETHER ANCHOR FITTING

Other child restraints have a flexible- 7. Route the tether strap over the The above illustration shows how
type connector as shown above. seat-back through the outsides of the attaching clip should be routed
the head restraint legs, then in EU countries.
attach the attaching clip to the
tether anchor fitting in the ceiling
as shown in the illustration. Make
sure the strap is not twisted, then
tighten the strap according to the
child restraint system maker’s
instructions.

56 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:22:28 32SWA600_062

Installing a Child Restraint System

ATTACHING CLIP 8. Push and pull the child restraint Using the Centre Lower Anchorages
system forward and from side-to-
side to verify that it is secure. TETHER ANCHOR FITTING

TETHER ANCHOR FITTING CENTRE LOWER


ANCHORAGES COVER
On some child restraint types, route
the tether strap between the legs of To install a child restraint system in
the head restraint as shown. the rear centre seating position, use
the centre lower anchorages as
shown above.

1. Follow step 1 through 5 as


described previously to secure the
child restraint system.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 57


06/09/13 18:22:36 32SWA600_063

Installing a Child Restraint System

2. Lower the head restraint to its The design and suitability of the
lowest position. child restraint systems must be
TETHER ANCHOR FITTING carefully checked with the child
3. Pull down the cover to access the restraint system manufacturer
tether anchor fitting. concerned and the seller of those
systems. If you are not sure, consult
TETHER ANCHOR your dealer before purchasing this
type of child restraint system.

ATTACHING CLIP

On some child restraint system,


route the tether strap over the
ATTACHING CLIP head restraint as shown.

4. Route the tether strap over the 5. Push and pull the child restraint
seat-back, then attach the system forward and from side-to-
attaching clip to the tether anchor side to verify that it is secure.
fitting in the centre of the ceiling,
making sure the strap is not
twisted. Tighten the strap
according to the child restraint
system maker’s instructions.

58 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:22:45 32SWA600_064

Installing a Child Restraint System

Installing a Child Restraint For EU countries, refer to page


System with a Lap/Shoulder Belt 52 for installing a child restraint
When not using the lower system.
anchorages system, all child
restraint systems must be secured to The procedures in the following
the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ pages are described based on a front
shoulder belt. facing child restraint system
available in EU countries.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
the back seating positions have a 1. Place the child restraint system in
lockable retractor that must be the desired back seating position.
activated to secure a child restraint Make sure the child restraint is
system. positioned well back in the seat-
back. 2. Route the belt through the
If you intend to install a child restraint according to the restraint
restraint system in the centre If you place the child restraint system maker’s instructions, then
seating position of the rear seat, system in any rear seating position insert the latch plate into the
make sure the detachable seat belt and use the tether strap for buckle.
anchor is securely latched (see page additional security, make sure to set
199 ). the head restraint properly and
attach the attaching clip to the
To properly route a lap/shoulder belt anchor fitting before securing the
through a child restraint system, child restraint system with the lap/
follow the restraint system maker’s shoulder belt.
instructions.
CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 59


06/09/13 18:22:52 32SWA600_065

Installing a Child Restraint System

3. To activate the lockable retractor, 4. Push down the tab. Route the 6. After confirming that the belt is
slowly pull the shoulder part of the shoulder part of the belt into the locked, grab the shoulder part of
belt all the way out until it stops. slit at the side of the restraint, the belt near the buckle, and pull
then let the belt feed back into the up to remove any slack from the
retractor. lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
5. After the belt has retracted, tug the child restraint system will not
on it. If the belt is locked, you be secure.
will not be able to pull it out. If
you can pull the belt out, it is not
locked, and you will need to
repeat these steps.

60 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:22:58 32SWA600_066

Installing a Child Restraint System

To remove slack, it may help to


put weight on the child restraint
system, or push on the back of the
restraint system while pulling up
on the belt.

7. Secure the belt in the slit by 8. Push and pull the child restraint
pushing up the tab. Make sure the system forward and from side-to-
belt is not twisted and it is side to verify that it is secure
positioned properly in the slit. enough to stay upright during
normal driving manoeuvres. If the
child restraint system is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 61


06/09/13 18:23:04 32SWA600_067

Installing a Child Restraint System

To deactivate the lockable retractor LOCKING CLIP


and remove a child restraint system,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.

Except for European models


On vehicles without lockable retractor
fitted to the seat where the child is
positioned
When you secure a child restraint
system with a lap/shoulder belt, be
sure you install a locking clip on the
seat belt (see page 63 ).

62 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:23:14 32SWA600_068

Installing a Child Restraint System

Using a Seat Belt Locking Clip To install a locking clip, do the


LOCKING CLIP
Except for European models following:
On vehicles without lockable retractor
fitted to the seat where the child is 1. Place the child restraint in the seat
positioned with a lap/shoulder belt. Route the
Always use a seat belt locking clip lap/shoulder belt through the
when you secure a child restraint restraint according to the seat
system to your vehicle with a lap/ manufacturer’s instructions.
shoulder belt. This helps prevent the
restraint system from shifting 2. Insert the latch plate into the
position or overturning. buckle. Pull on the shoulder part
of the belt to make sure there is
A locking clip is usually included no slack in the lap portion.
with the child restraint system. If 4. Install the locking clip as shown.
you need a clip, contact the seat’s 3. Tightly grasp the belt near the Position the clip as close as
manufacturer or a store that sells latch plate. Pinch both parts of the possible to the latch plate.
child restraints. belt together so they won’t slip
through the latch plate. Unbuckle 5. Insert the latch plate into the
If it is necessary to put a front facing the seat belt. buckle. Push and pull on the child
child restraint system in the front, restraint system to verify that it is
move the vehicle seat as far to the held firmly in place. If it is not,
rear as possible, be sure the child repeat these steps until the
restraint system is firmly secured to restraint is secure.
the vehicle, and the child is properly
strapped in the restraint system (see
page 48 ).

Driver and Passenger Safety 63


06/09/13 18:23:23 32SWA600_069

Installing a Child Restraint System

Installing a Child Restraint Since a tether can provide additional Using an Outer Anchor Fitting
System with a Tether security to the lap/shoulder belt
Children riding in vehicles should be installation, we recommend using a ATTACHING CLIP
restrained to minimize the risk of tether whenever one is required or
injury in the event of an accident. available. (The owners may check
with the child restraint system
TETHER ANCHOR POINTS maker to determine whether a tether
is available for a particular child
restraint system.)

TETHER STRAP ANCHOR FITTING

1. After properly securing the child


restraint system (see page 54 or
59 ), route the tether strap over
the seat-back and on both sides of
A child restraint system with a tether the head restraint as shown.
can be installed in any seating
position in the back seat, using one The above illustration shows how
of the anchor points shown in the the tether strap should be routed
illustration. in EU countries.

64 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:23:32 32SWA600_070

Installing a Child Restraint System

2. Attach the attaching clip to the Using the Centre Anchor


anchor fitting, making sure the
ATTACHING CLIP strap is not twisted. TETHER ANCHOR FITTING

3. Tighten the tether strap according


to the child restraint system
maker’s instructions.

ANCHOR FITTING COVER

On some child restraint types, route 1. Push down the rear centre head
the tether strap between the legs of restraint to the lowest position.
the head restraint as shown.
2. After properly securing the child
restraint system (see page 59 ),
open the anchor cover.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 65


06/09/13 18:23:39 32SWA600_071

Installing a Child Restraint System

To attach the tether to the child


restraint system, follow the child
TETHER ANCHOR FITTING TETHER ANCHOR FITTING restraint system maker’s instructions.

When the child restraint system is


used, follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint system.

WARNING: Child restraint anchorages


are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are
ATTACHING CLIP ATTACHING CLIP they to be used for adult seat belts,
harnesses or for attaching other items
3. Route the tether strap over the On some child restraint system, or equipment to the vehicle.
head restraint, then attach the route the tether strap over the head
attaching clip to the anchor fitting, restraint as shown.
making sure the tether strap is not
twisted. 4. Tighten the tether strap according
to the child restraint system
maker’s instructions.

66 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:23:44 32SWA600_072

Protecting Larger Children

When a child reaches the


recommended weight or height limit
for a front facing child restraint Allowing a child age 12 or Leaning over the front door
system, the child should sit in a back under to sit in front can result can result in serious injury or
seat on a booster seat and wear a in injury or death if the death if the side airbag
lap/shoulder belt. passenger’s front airbag inflates.
inflates.
The following pages give Always sit upright with their
instructions on how to check proper If a child must ride in front, back against the seat-back.
seat belt fit, what kind of booster move the vehicle seat as far
seat to use if one is needed, and back as possible, use a
important precautions for a child booster seat if needed, have
who must sit in front. the child sit up properly and
wear the seat belt properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety 67


06/09/13 18:23:55 32SWA600_073

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit 3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat
between the child’s neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as


possible, touching the child’s
thighs?

5. Will the child be able to stay


seated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these


questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a front
properly fits a child, have the child facing child restraint system should
put on the seat belt, then ask ride in a back seat and use a booster
yourself: seat until the lap/shoulder belt fits
them properly without the booster.
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend


comfortably over the edge of the
seat?

68 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:24:02 32SWA600_074

Protecting Larger Children

Booster seats can be high-back or A child may continue using a booster


low-back. Whichever style you select, seat until the tops of their ears are
make sure the booster seat meets even with the top of the vehicle’s or
approved safety standards (see page booster’s seat-back. A child of this
49 ) and that you follow the booster height should be tall enough to use
seat maker’s instructions. the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
If a child who uses a booster seat GUIDE
must ride in front, move the vehicle For EU countries, refer to page
seat as far back as possible and be 52 for the booster seat placement.
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.

A back-rest may be available for a


specific booster seat. Install the
back-rest to the booster seat and
adjust it to the vehicle seat according
to the booster seat maker’s
instructions. Make sure the seat belt
is properly routed through the guide
at the shoulder of the back-rest and
the belt does not touch and cross the
child’s neck (see page 19 ).

Driver and Passenger Safety 69


06/09/13 18:24:14 32SWA600_075

Protecting Larger Children

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely
Front while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to:
It is recommended that all children when a child can safely ride in front,
age 12 and under be properly there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual,
restrained in the back seat. should consider. and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
The back seat is the safest place for Physical Size information.
a child of any age or size. Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
If the passenger’s front airbag properly fit (see pages 19 and 67 ). If most position.
inflates in a moderate to severe the seat belt does not fit properly,
frontal collision, the airbag can cause with or without the child sitting on a Have the child sit up straight, back
serious injuries to a child who is booster seat, the child should not sit against the seat, and feet on or
unrestrained, improperly restrained, in front. near the floor.
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position. Maturity Check that the child’s seat belt is
To safely ride in front, a child must properly and securely positioned.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any be able to follow the rules, including
part of a larger child’s body is in the sitting properly, and wearing the seat Remind the child not to lean
path of a deploying side airbag, the belt properly throughout a ride. toward the door.
child could receive possibly serious
injuries. Supervise the child. Even a mature
child sometimes needs to be
reminded to fasten the seat belt or
sit properly.

70 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:24:20 32SWA600_076

Protecting Larger Children

Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a


Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a
crash. seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.

Two children should never use the


same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety 71


06/09/13 18:24:29 32SWA600_077

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the tailgate open, airflow can
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even tailgate open, open all the windows,
follow the information on this page. kill you. and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or shown below.
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide. If you must sit in your parked vehicle
The vehicle is raised for an oil with the engine running, even in an
change. unconfined area, adjust the heating
High levels of carbon monoxide can and cooling system/climate control
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, system as follows:
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed. 1. Select the fresh air mode.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 2. Select the mode.
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
underside. vehicle out of the garage. 4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.

72 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:24:39 32SWA600_078

Safety Labels

These labels are in the locations EXPANSION TANK CAP DANGER LABEL
shown. They warn you of potential (Diesel models) DUAL DECK LUGGAGE SHELF WARNING *
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully. CHILD SAFETY/SRS AIRBAG
(Left-hand drive type)
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your dealer for a
replacement.

The label shown below is attached to


the back of the bonnet. CHILD SAFETY/SRS AIRBAG
(Right-hand drive type)
SRS Airbag
SRS AIRBAG

SRS Airbag

Safety alert symbol


SIDE AIRBAG

Follow service manual CHILD SAFETY


instructions carefully
RADIATOR CAP DANGER LABEL
(Petrol models) BATTERY DANGER LABEL

* : If equipped CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 73


06/09/13 18:24:48 32SWA600_079

Safety Labels

The label shown below is attached to On Diesel models On vehicles with dual deck luggage
each front doorjamb. Symbols on top of the shelf
engine under the engine cover are to The label shown below is attached to
remind you to follow the service the left side on the dual deck
manual instructions. When replacing luggage shelf.
the injectors, your authorized dealer
should perform this work. Contact
your dealer.

Side Airbag

Safety alert symbol

Follow owner’ s manual


instructions carefully

74 Driver and Passenger Safety


06/09/13 18:24:53 32SWA600_080

Instruments and Controls

This section gives information about Turn Signal and Headlights.......... 164 Reclining the Front Seats ......... 194
the controls and displays that Front and Rear Fog Lights ........... 166 Folding the Rear Seats Down .. 195
contribute to the daily operation of Adaptive Front Lighting System Folding the Rear Seat
your vehicle. All the essential (AFS) ........................................... 168 Forward .................................. 197
controls are within easy reach. Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 170 Detachable Anchor.................... 199
Hazard Warning Button ................ 171 Seat Heaters ................................... 201
Control Locations ............................ 76 Rear Window Demister ................ 171 Tonneau Cover............................... 202
Instrument Panel ............................. 78 Headlight Adjuster ........................ 173 Dual Deck Luggage Shelf ............ 205
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 82 Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 174 Power Windows ............................. 208
Gauges .............................................. 97 Keys and Locks.............................. 175 Sunshades ....................................... 210
Speedometer ................................ 99 Immobilizer System....................... 176 Mirrors ............................................ 212
Tachometer .................................. 99 Ignition Switch ............................... 177 Parking Brake ................................ 214
Temperature Gauge .................... 99 Door Locks ..................................... 178 Interior Convenience Items .......... 215
Fuel Gauge ................................... 99 Power Door Locks ..................... 178 Lower Glove Box ....................... 216
Information Display................... 100 Super Locking ............................ 180 Upper Glove Box ....................... 216
Odometer .................................... 100 Childproof Door Locks ............. 181 Beverage Holders ...................... 217
Trip Meter .................................. 100 Remote Transmitter ...................... 182 Accessory Power Sockets......... 218
Current Fuel Mileage ................ 101 Tailgate ........................................... 186 Console Compartment .............. 219
Average Fuel Mileage ............... 101 Seats ................................................ 188 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 219
Range .......................................... 101 Driver’s Seat Power Conversation Mirror ................. 220
Outside Temperature Indicator ...... 102 Adjustments ........................... 188 Coat Hook ................................... 221
Multi-information Display............. 104 Manual Seat Adjustments......... 189 Sun Visor .................................... 221
Controls Near the Steering Driver’s Seat Height Vanity Mirror ............................. 221
Wheel .......................................... 158 Adjustment ............................. 190 Cigarette Lighter ....................... 222
Windscreen Wipers and Armrests ..................................... 191 Ashtray........................................ 222
Washers ...................................... 160 Head Restraints ......................... 192 Interior Lights ................................ 223

Instruments and Controls 75


06/09/13 18:25:01 32SWA600_081

Control Locations

Left-hand drive type HEATING/COOLING SUNSHADE HAZARD WARNING


CONTROLS* (P.228) SWITCH* BUTTON
CLIMATE CONTROL (P.210) (P.171)
MULTI-INFORMATION SYSTEM* (P.235)
CLOCK*
DISPLAY* (P.104) (P.277)
INFORMATION DISPLAY
(P.100)
AUDIO SYSTEM*
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.245)
(P.212)

POWER DOOR LOCK


MASTER SWITCH
(P.178)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.208)
MANUAL
FUEL FILL DOOR TRANSMISSION
RELEASE HANDLE (P.354)
(P.333) AUTOMATIC
BONNET RELEASE TRANSMISSION
HANDLE (P.335) (P.358)
SEAT HEATER AUXILIARY ACCESSORY
SWITCHES* INPUT JACK* POWER SOCKET
Vehicle without navigation system is shown. (P.201) (P.275) (P.218)

* : If equipped

76 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 18:25:10 32SWA600_082

Control Locations

Right-hand drive type SUNSHADE SWITCH* MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY*


(P.210) (P.104)
INFORMATION DISPLAY
HAZARD WARNING (P.100)
BUTTON
(P.171) MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.212)

CLOCK*
(P.277) POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.178)

AUDIO SYSTEM*
(P.171) POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.208)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS* FUEL FILL DOOR
(P.228) RELEASE HANDLE
CLIMATE CONTROL (P.333)
SYSTEM*
(P.235)
BONNET RELEASE
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.354) HANDLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P.358) (P.335)
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK*(P.275) ACCESSORY POWER SEAT HEATER
SOCKET (P.218) SWITCHES (P.201)
Vehicle without navigation system is shown.

* : If equipped

Instruments and Controls 77


06/09/13 18:25:20 32SWA600_083

Instrument Panel (Petrol models)


On vehicle with information display

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.91) CRUISE CONTROL


VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.90) MAIN INDICATOR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
(P.91) SYSTEM INDICATOR
REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.89) (P.86)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.94) VEHICLE STABILITY
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
SYSTEM (AFS) INDICATOR (P.92) INDICATOR (P.90)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
INDICATOR LAMP (P.82, 508) (P.82)
FRONT FOG LIGHT SUPPLEMENTAL
INDICATOR (P.89) RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.35, 87)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
(P.94) ELECTRIC POWER
LOW FUEL INDICATOR STEERING (EPS)
(P.96) INDICATOR (P.89)
LIGHT CONTROL TRAILER STABILITY
INDICATOR (P.94) ASSIST (TSATM) FUNCTION
INDICATOR (P.92)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR (RED) (P.84, 503) IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.88)
OIL LEVEL INDICATOR
(AMBER) (P.84, 504) PARKING SENSOR INDICATORS (P.95)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.84, 507) DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN MONITOR (P.95)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE REAR SEAT BELT USE MONITOR (P.83)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.86, 512) SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.95)

Since the indicators vary in models, some indicators are not on your vehicle.
78 Instruments and Controls
06/09/13 18:25:29 32SWA600_084

Instrument Panel (Petrol models)


On vehicle with multi-information display

SYSTEM MESSAGE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL


INDICATOR (P.87) (ACC) INDICATOR
(AMBER, GREEN) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
(P.91) SYSTEM INDICATOR
REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.89) (P.86)

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.94) VEHICLE STABILITY


ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
ADAPTIVE FRONT INDICATOR (P.90)
LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)
INDICATOR (P.92) VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR (P.90)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP (P.82, 508) SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.82)
FRONT FOG LIGHT SUPPLEMENTAL
INDICATOR (P.89) RESTRAINT
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.94) (P.35, 87)
COLLISION MITIGATION ELECTRIC POWER
BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) STEERING (EPS)
INDICATOR (P.93) INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER (P.89)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.84, 503) (P.88)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.84, 507) LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.96)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.86, 512) SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.95)

Since the indicators vary in models, some indicators are not on your vehicle.
Instruments and Controls 79
06/09/21 20:50:25 32SWA600_085

Instrument Panel (Diesel models)


On vehicle with information display

CRUISE CONTROL MAIN INDICATOR (P.91) WATER IN FUEL FILTER


CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.91) INDICATOR
REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.89) (P.85)
VSA
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.94) ACTIVATION ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.86)
(P.82, 509) (P.90)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
SYSTEM (AFS) INDICATOR (P.92) (P.90)
FRONT FOG LIGHT
INDICATOR (P.89) SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.82)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.94)
SUPPLEMENTAL
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.96) RESTRAINT SYSTEM
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P.84, 507) (P.35, 87)
LIGHT CONTROL TRAILER STABILITY ASSIST
INDICATOR (P.94) (TSATM) FUNCTION
INDICATOR
PGM-FI INDICATOR
(P.92)
(P.85, 510)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (RED) IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.88)
(P.84, 503) PARKING SENSOR INDICATOR (P.95)
OIL LEVEL INDICATOR (AMBER)
(P.84, 504) DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN MONITOR (P.95)
GLOW PLUGS INDICATOR (P.85) REAR SEAT BELT USE MONITOR (P.83)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.95)
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
INDICATOR (P.88) PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.86, 512)

Since the indicators vary in models, some indicators are not on your vehicle.
80 Instruments and Controls
06/09/13 18:25:49 32SWA600_086

Instrument Panel (Diesel models)


On vehicle with multi-information display

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR (P.87) ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)


INDICATOR (AMBER, GREEN)
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.90) (P.91)
REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.89)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.94) SYSTEM INDICATOR
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING (P.86)
SYSTEM (AFS) INDICATOR (P.92)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
LAMP (P.82, 509) (P.90)
FRONT FOG LIGHT SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.89) INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.82)
(P.94)
SUPPLEMENTAL
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.96) RESTRAINT SYSTEM
COLLISION MITIGATION INDICATOR
BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) (P.35, 87)
INDICATOR (P.93)
SECURITY SYSTEM IMMOBILIZER
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.95) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.88)
(P.84, 503)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
GLOW PLUGS INDICATOR (P.85) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.86, 512)

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.84, 507)

Since the indicators vary in models, some indicators are not on your vehicle.
Instruments and Controls 81
06/09/13 18:26:01 32SWA600_087

Instrument Panel Indicators

The instrument panel has many Seat Belt Reminder sound and the indicator will flash
indicators to give you important Indicator again at regular intervals. For more
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you information, see page 24 .
turn the ignition switch to the ON
Malfunction Indicator (II) position. It reminds you and your On vehicles with multi-information
Lamp passengers to fasten your seat belts. display
See page 508 on petrol models and A beeper also sounds if you have not You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’
page 509 on diesel models. fastened your seat belt. (for a driver)/‘‘ ’’ (for a front
passenger), or this symbol with a
You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ If you turn the ignition switch to the ‘‘FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT’’ or
or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK ON (II) position before fastening ‘‘FASTEN YOUR PASSENGER’S
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- your seat belt, the beeper sounds SEAT BELT’’ message in the multi-
information display (see page 122 ). and the indicator flashes. If you do information display to remind you
not fasten your seat belt before the and your passengers to fasten your
On Diesel models only beeper stops, the indicator stops seat belts.
This indicator will also come on flashing but remains on.
when you restart the engine after The seat belt system also monitors
your vehicle has run out of fuel (see If a front passenger does not fasten the seat belt use of all three rear
page 461 ). their seat belt, the indicator will seating positions according to the
come on about 6 seconds after the activation of each seat belt retractor.
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position. On vehicles with information display
The rear seat belt use monitor will
If either the driver or a front show you the seat belt use (see page
passenger does not fasten their seat 83 ).
belt while driving, the beeper will

82 Instruments and Controls


06/12/07 11:37:17 32SWA600_088

Instrument Panel Indicators

On vehicles with multi-information Rear Seat Belt Use Monitor The seat belt system detects any
display seat belt use of all three rear seat
The centre display will show you the seating positions according to the
seat belt use on the rear seat (see activation of each seat belt retractor.
page 115 ). The highlighted indicators show you
how many rear seat belts are being
used and remind you and your
passengers to fasten their seat belts.

The seat belt indicator system


judges the use of the seat belt
REAR SEAT BELT USE INDICATORS based on the amount of seat
belt pulled out from the
On vehicles with information display retractor. It is not an indicator
When you turn the ignition switch to to show that the seat belt is
the ON (II) position, the centre of actually latched. Correct
the information display shows the latching of the seat belts
rear seat belt use. should be confirmed whenever
the indicator shows a seat belt
The above illustration shows all is in use.
three rear seat belts used.
If any indicator does not come on,
there may be a problem with the
system. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.

Instruments and Controls 83


06/09/13 18:26:20 32SWA600_089

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Oil Pressure Oil Level Indicator


Indicator (Red) (Amber)
The engine can be severely damaged On vehicles with information display If you ignore the oil level indicator
if this indicator comes on red and If this indicator comes on amber and keep driving with this indicator
flashes or stays on when the engine when the engine is running, the on, you can seriously damage the
is running. For more information, engine oil level is low. You should engine.
see page 503 . check the oil level and add engine oil.
For more information, see page 504 . Charging System
On vehicles with multi-information Indicator
display This indicator is used for 2 purposes. If this indicator comes on when the
You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ engine is running, the battery is not
or this symbol with an ‘‘OIL 1. Amber light − Low oil level as being charged. For more information,
PRESSURE LOW’’ message on the described above. see page 507 .
multi-information display (see page
122 ). 2. Red light − Low oil pressure. If On vehicles with multi-information
the indicator comes on red, there display
may be serious engine damage. You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’
or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
Do not confuse these two different SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
indicator meanings. information display (see page 125 ).

84 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 18:26:30 32SWA600_090

Instrument Panel Indicators

Glow Plugs Indicator PGM-FI Indicator Water In Fuel Filter


(Diesel models only) (Diesel models only) Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few On vehicles with information display (Diesel models only)
seconds (several seconds in cold If this indicator comes on, there is a On vehicles with information display
weather or at high altitudes) when problem with the engine control If this indicator comes on, it means
you turn the ignition switch to the system. If this happens, have your that water stays in the fuel system.
ON (II) position. When the engine is vehicle checked by your dealer as This may cause damage to the fuel
cold, wait for the indicator to go off soon as possible. If you ignore this injection system. Contact your dealer
before starting the engine. indicator and continue driving, the as soon as possible and have the fuel
engine control system will be filter checked to drain off water.
If you experience any of the seriously damaged. For more
following symptoms, there may be a information, see page 510 .
problem with the water temperature
sensor of the fuel system. Have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer.

This indicator goes out faster than


normal when the outside
temperature is very low.

It is hard to start the engine.

Instruments and Controls 85


06/09/13 18:26:41 32SWA600_091

Instrument Panel Indicators

Parking Brake and 2. If it remains lit after you fully Anti-lock Brake System
Brake System Indicator release the parking brake while (ABS) Indicator
This indicator has two functions: the engine is running, or if it This indicator normally comes on for
comes on while driving, there a few seconds when you turn the
1. It comes on when you turn the could be a problem with the brake ignition switch to the ON (II)
ignition switch to the ON (II) system. For more information, see position, and when the ignition
position. It is a reminder to check page 512 . switch is turned to the START (III)
the parking brake. A beeper position. If it comes on at any other
sounds if you drive with the On vehicles with multi-information time, there is a problem with the
parking brake not fully released. display ABS. If this happens, have your
Driving with the parking brake not You will also see the symbol vehicle checked at a dealer. With
fully released can damage the ‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a this indicator on, your vehicle still
brakes and tyres. ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message in has normal braking ability but no
the multi-information display (see anti-lock function. For more
On vehicles with multi-information page 122 ). information, see page 366 .
display
You will also see the symbol On vehicles with multi-information
‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a display
‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’ You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’
message in the multi-information or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
display (see page 117 ). SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page 125 ).

86 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 18:26:50 32SWA600_092

Instrument Panel Indicators

System Message Supplemental Restraint On vehicles with multi-information


Indicator System Indicator display
On vehicles with multi-information This indicator comes on briefly when You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’
display you turn the ignition switch to the or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
This indicator comes on when there ON (II) position. If it comes on at SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
is a system message in the multi- any other time, it indicates a information display.
information display. Press the INFO potential problem with your front
button on the steering wheel to see airbags. This indicator will also alert
the message (see page 105 ). you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, side curtain airbags, or
Most of the time, this indicator automatic seat belt tensioners. For
comes on along with other indicators more information, see page 35 .
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS On vehicles with collision mitigation
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc. brake system (CMBS)
This indicator will also alert you to
the seat belt e-pretensioners.

Instruments and Controls 87


06/09/13 18:26:57 32SWA600_093

Instrument Panel Indicators

Immobilizer System Diesel Particulate Filter If you ignore the indicator blinking,
Indicator (DPF) Indicator it stops blinking, then stays on. If
This indicator comes on briefly when (Diesel models with DPF only) this happens, take your vehicle to a
you turn the ignition switch to the On vehicles with information display Honda dealer as soon as possible to
ON (II) position. It will go off if you If this indicator blinks while the have the DPF system checked. If
have inserted a properly-coded engine is running, the diesel you ignore this indicator and
ignition key. If it is not a properly- particulate filter (DPF) should be continue driving, the DPF and your
coded key, the indicator will blink regenerated to remove the vehicle’s emission control systems
and the engine’s fuel system will be accumulated particulate matter (PM). will be seriously damaged. For more
disabled (see page 176 ). information of the DPF system, see
To regenerate the DPF, when traffic page 534 .
allows, maintain a vehicle speed of at
least 60 km/h (37 mph) and continue
to drive until the indicator goes out
(it may take up to about 10 minutes).
This will increase the exhaust
temperature and help to burn and
remove the PM from the DPF.

88 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 18:27:08 32SWA600_094

Instrument Panel Indicators

Electric Power Steering If you turn the steering wheel to the Rear Fog Light Indicator
(EPS) Indicator full left or right position repeatedly
This indicator normally comes on while stopping or driving at very low This indicator comes on when you
when you turn the ignition switch to speed, you may feel slightly harder turn on the rear fog light. See page
the ON (II) position and goes off steering to avoid the damage from 166 for information on operating the
after the engine starts. If it comes on overheating of the steering gear box. rear fog light.
at any other time, there is a problem
in the electric power steering system. On vehicles with multi-information Front Fog Light
display Indicator
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ (For some types)
safe place and turn off the engine. or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK This indicator comes on when you
Reset the system by restarting the SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- turn on the front fog lights. See page
engine. The indicator will stay on, information display (see page 126 ). 167 for information on operating the
but should go off after driving a front fog lights.
short distance. If it does not go off,
or comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be turned off,
making the vehicle harder to steer.

Instruments and Controls 89


06/09/13 18:27:19 32SWA600_095

Instrument Panel Indicators

Vehicle Stability Assist On vehicles with multi-information 4. It comes on along with the VSA
(VSA) System Indicator display system indicator if there is a
This indicator normally comes on for You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ problem with the VSA system.
a few seconds when you turn the or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK You will also see the symbol
ignition switch to the ON (II) SYSTEM’’ message in the multi- ‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a
position, and when the ignition information display (see page 126 ). ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on
switch is turned to the START (III) the multi-information display (see
position. VSA Activation Indicator page 126 ).

If it comes on and stays on at any This indicator has four functions: This indicator normally comes on for
other time, or if it does not come on a few seconds when you turn the
when you turn the ignition switch to 1. It comes on as a reminder that you ignition switch to the ON (II)
the ON (II) position, there is a have turned off the vehicle position, and when the ignition
problem with the VSA system. Take stability assist (VSA) system. switch is turned to the START (III)
your vehicle to a dealer to have it position. See page 378 for more
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see information on the VSA system.
still has normal driving ability, but page 378 ).
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page 3. It flashes when trailer stability
378 for more information on the assist is activating (see page 390 ).
VSA system.

This indicator may also come on if


there is a problem with the trailer
stability assist function (see page
390 ).

90 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 18:27:30 32SWA600_096

Instrument Panel Indicators

Cruise Main Indicator Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control


(ACC) Indicator (Amber) (ACC) Indicator (Green)
If equipped If equipped If equipped
This indicator comes on when you This indicator normally comes on for When you push the ACC button on
turn on the cruise control system by a few seconds when you turn the the steering wheel, this indicator
pressing the CRUISE button (see ignition switch to the ON (II) comes on green. You will also see
page 282 ). position. ‘‘ACC’’ on the multi-information
display (see page 292 ).
Cruise Control Indicator If the indicator comes on amber,
there is a problem with the ACC
If equipped system. You will also see the symbol
This indicator comes on when you ‘‘ ’’ or this symbol with a
set the cruise control. See page ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the
282 for information on operating the multi-information display. Take your
cruise control. vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. For more information, see
page 285 .

Instruments and Controls 91


06/09/13 18:27:41 32SWA600_097

Instrument Panel Indicators

Trailer Stability Assist Adaptive Front Lighting If this happens, stop the vehicle in a
(TSA TM) Function System (AFS) Indicator safe place, turn the ignition switch to
Indicator (For some types) the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
On vehicles with information display This indicator normally comes on for position, and restart the engine. If
This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the the indicator blinks again, take your
a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
ignition switch to the ON (II) position. For more information, see page 168 .
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the It comes on as a reminder that you
trailer stability assist function. Have have turned off the adaptive front
your vehicle checked by your dealer lighting system (AFS) by pressing
as soon as possible. the AFS off switch (see page 169 ).

In this case, your vehicle still has the This indicator blinks when there is a
VSA traction and stability problem with the AFS system.
enhancement, but it will not have the
trailer stability assist function. For On vehicles with multi-information
more information, see page 390 . display
You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’
or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display.

92 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 18:27:50 32SWA600_098

Instrument Panel Indicators

Collision Mitigation If the indicator comes on at any


Brake System (CMBS) other time, there is a problem with
Indicator the CMBS. You will also see the Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
On vehicle with the adaptive cruise symbol ‘‘ ’’ or this symbol with a Indicators
control system ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the The left or right turn signal indicator
This indicator normally comes on for multi-information display. If this blinks when you signal a lane change
a few seconds when you turn the happens, take your vehicle to a or turn. If an indicator does not blink
ignition switch to the ON (II) dealer, and have it checked. For or blinks rapidly, it usually means
position. It also comes on as a more information, see page 368 . one of the turn signal bulbs is
reminder that you have turned off When this indicator is on, the CMBS burned out (see page 432 ). Replace
the collision mitigation brake system is not working. the bulb as soon as possible, since
(CMBS) by pressing the CMBS off other drivers cannot see that you are
switch (see page 371 ). signalling.

The CMBS indicator also comes on When you press the hazard warning
if dirt or other debris blocks the button, both turn signal indicators
radar sensor in the front grille. and all turn signals on the outside of
When you clean the radar sensor, the vehicle will flash.
the indicator should go off the next
time you turn the ignition switch to Your vehicle has the one-push turn
the ON (II) position. signal feature to signal a lane change
easily (see page 164 ).

Instruments and Controls 93


06/09/13 18:27:59 32SWA600_099

Instrument Panel Indicators

High Beam Indicator On vehicles with multi-information Light Control Indicator


display (For some types)
This indicator comes on with the You will also see the symbol On vehicles with information display
high beam headlights. For more ‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a This indicator normally comes on for
information, see page 164 . ‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message on a few seconds when you turn the
the multi-information display (see ignition switch to the ON (II)
Lights On Indicator page 119 ). position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
This indicator reminds you that the On vehicles with automatic lighting on automatic lighting control system.
exterior lights are on. It comes on feature Have your vehicle checked by your
when the light switch is in either the This indicator also comes on when dealer as soon as possible.
or position. If you turn the the light switch is in AUTO and the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY lights turn on automatically. On vehicles with multi-information
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without display
turning off the light switch, this You will see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’
indicator will remain on. A reminder or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
chime will also sound when you open SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
the driver’s door without the key in information display if there is a
the ignition switch. problem with the automatic
headlight control system.

94 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 18:28:10 32SWA600_100

Instrument Panel Indicators

Parking Sensor Indicators Door and Tailgate Open Monitor Security System Indicator
(For some types) (For some types)
LEFT CORNER RIGHT CORNER
SENSOR SENSOR DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN
INDICATORS INDICATORS INDICATORS INDICATORS

TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR


REAR CENTRE SENSOR INDICATOR SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
On vehicles with information display
On vehicles with information display The appropriate indicator comes on This indicator comes on when the
The appropriate indicator(s) in this in this display if the tailgate or any security system is set. See page
monitor comes on or blinks when door is not closed tightly. 279 for more information on the
each four corner sensor and two rear security system.
centre sensors are activated. For
more information of how to activate
the parking sensors, see page 303 .

Instruments and Controls 95


06/09/13 17:06:11 32SWA600_101

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Fuel Indicator When the indicator comes on, there


is about 8.6 of fuel remaining in the
This indicator comes on as a tank before the reading reaches 0.
reminder that you must refuel soon. There is a small reserve of fuel
remaining in the tank when the
On vehicle with multi-information reading reaches 0.
display
You will also see the symbol On diesel models
‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with Refer to Priming the Fuel System
‘‘FUEL LOW’’ (petrol models) or on page 461 if your vehicle runs out
‘‘DIESEL FUEL LOW’’ (diesel of fuel.
models) message on the multi-
information display.

96 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:06:17 32SWA600_102

Gauges
On vehicles with information display

INFORMATION DISPLAY
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CURRENT FUEL MILEAGE

ODOMETER/AVERAGE FUEL MILEAGE


TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE TRIP METER

TEMPERATURE GAUGE SELECT/RESET KNOB


Diesel model is shown.

Instruments and Controls 97


06/09/13 17:06:22 32SWA600_103

Gauges
On vehicles with multi-information display

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATURE SELECT/RESET KNOB


GAUGE
Diesel model with navigation system is shown.

98 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:06:32 32SWA600_104

Gauges

Speedometer Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge


This shows your speed in kilometers This shows the temperature of the This shows how much fuel you have.
per hour (km/h) or miles per hour engine’s coolant. During normal It may show slightly more or less
(mph) depending on the type. operation, the reading should be in than the actual amount.
the middle of the gauge. In severe
You can set the vehicle speed alarm. driving conditions, such as very hot
For more information, see page 133 . weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the reading may reach near On petrol models only
Tachometer the red mark. If it reaches the red Avoid driving with an extremely low
The tachometer shows the engine (hot) mark, pull safely to the side of fuel level. Running out of fuel could
speed in revolutions per minute the road. Turn to page 499 on petrol cause the engine to misfire,
(rpm). To protect the engine from models and page 501 on diesel damaging the catalytic converter.
damage, never drive with the models for instructions and
tachometer needle in the red zone. precautions on checking the engine
cooling system.
On diesel models only
The malfunction indicator lamp or
the PGM-FI indicator will come on
when you restart the engine after
your vehicle has run out of fuel.

Instruments and Controls 99


06/09/13 17:06:44 32SWA600_105

Gauges

Information Display Odometer


(For some types) The odometer shows the total
number of kilometers or miles your
Left-hand drive type vehicle has been driven.

Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
kilometers or miles driven since you
last reset it.

Right-hand drive type There are two trip meters: Trip A


and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the Select/
Reset knob repeatedly.

Each trip meter works independently,


so you can keep track of two
The information display consists of To switch the display, press and different distances.
three segments. The upper segment release the Select/Reset knob
displays current fuel mileage, the repeatedly. When you turn the To reset a trip meter, display it, and
second segment displays the ignition switch to the ON (II) then press and hold the Select/Reset
odometer, average fuel mileage, position the last selection is knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
range (estimated distance), and the displayed.
lower segment displays the trip
meter.

100 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:06:54 32SWA600_106

Gauges

Current Fuel Mileage Average Fuel Mileage


When either of the trip meters (trip
Current Fuel Mileage Current Fuel Mileage A or B) is displayed, your vehicle’s
average fuel mileage since you last
reset that trip meter can be shown
on the information display (l/100 km
on left-hand drive type and mpg on
right-hand drive type). This number
is updated once per 10 seconds. To
see the average fuel mileage, press
and release the Select/Reset knob
repeatedly.
Right-hand drive type. Left-hand drive type.
Range (Estimated Distance)
This display shows the current, or from the diesel particulate filter This display shows the estimated
instant fuel mileage you are getting. (DPF). For more information, see distance you can travel on the fuel
page 534 . remaining in the tank.
It shows the number of l/100 km
(left-hand drive type) or mpg (right- This distance is estimated from the
hand drive type). fuel economy you have achieved
over the last few kilometers (miles),
On diesel models with DPF so it will vary with changes in speed,
The display may show a current fuel traffic condition, etc.
mileage reading higher than in
normal driving while the particulate
matter (PM) is burnt and removed

Instruments and Controls 101


06/09/13 17:07:02 32SWA600_107

Gauges

Outside Temperature Indicator The temperature sensor is in the


front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 30 km/h (19 mph).

The sensor delays the display update


OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR until it reaches the correct outside
Left-hand drive type is shown. temperature. This may take several
minutes.
This indicator displays the outside To adjust the outside temperature
temperature in Centigrade. If the outside temperature is display, press and hold the Select/
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust Reset knob for 10 seconds. The
it up to ±3°C warmer or cooler. display changes as shown above.

NOTE: The temperature must be


stabilized before doing this
procedure.

102 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:07:06 32SWA600_108

Gauges

Select the outside temperature


indicator by turning the Select/Reset
knob. The display begins to blink.
Push the same knob to enter this
setting, then turn it to adjust the
temperature. The following
sequence will appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, −3,
−2, −1, 0.

When it reaches the desired value,


push the Select/Reset knob to enter
the setting. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,


temperature readings indicate near
freezing (0°C) and the display starts
blinking. This could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.

Instruments and Controls 103


06/09/13 17:07:14 32SWA600_109

Multi-Information Display

On vehicles with multi-information Normal Display Symbols/


display Messages
The multi-information display
between the speedometer and UPPER SEGMENT UPPER SEGMENT
tachometer on the instrument panel
displays various information and
symbols/messages when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position.
Some of the indicators/messages MIDDLE SEGMENT MIDDLE SEGMENT
help you operate your vehicle more
effectively. Others keep you aware
LOWER SEGMENT LOWER SEGMENT
of the vehicle’s condition for
continued trouble-free driving.
Left-hand drive type Right-hand drive type
There are two types of symbols/
messages: normal display symbols/ The multi-information display In normal display mode, the upper
messages and system warning consists of an upper segment, a and middle segments display the trip
symbols/messages. middle segment and a lower computer and the rear seat belt use,
segment. Each segment can display and the lower segment displays the
You can select the displayed two lines of messages. odometer, trip meter, and outside
language and also customize some temperature.
vehicle control settings to your liking
with the multi-information display
and the two buttons on the steering
wheel (see page 105 ).

104 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:07:21 32SWA600_110

Multi-Information Display

Each time you press the INFO


button, the trip computer changes
from the average fuel economy to
the estimated distance to the elapsed
time to the average speed and then
to the rear seat belt use as shown on
the next page.
INFO If there is any system warning,
BUTTON
INFO system warning symbol(s) will be
BUTTON SEL/RESET shown on the multi-information
SEL/RESET BUTTON display following the speed alarm
BUTTON On vehicles with adaptive cruise setting. The system warning
On vehicles with cruise control control (ACC) symbol/message that has the
highest priority will be displayed first
The trip computer consists of the (see page 148 ). when you turn the ignition switch to
current fuel mileage, the average the ON (II) position.
fuel economy, the estimated distance, In the middle segment, the rear seat
the elapsed time, and the average belt use is also displayed.
speed. The upper segment always
displays one of the trip computer In the default setting, the upper
items as a primary display, and the display shows the current fuel
middle segment shows what you last mileage when you turn the ignition
selected when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. The
switch to the ON (II) position. You remaining trip computer items are
can customize it to your preference displayed in the middle segment. CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 105


06/09/13 17:07:27 32SWA600_111

Multi-Information Display

Left-hand drive type

Right-hand drive type

If you select the blank display in the middle segment, the upper display will also change to the blank display.
106 Instruments and Controls
06/09/13 17:07:40 32SWA600_112

Multi-Information Display

Indicators in the trip computer show: : The estimated distance you : The average speed you are
can travel on the fuel remaining in travelling is displayed in kilometres
Left-hand drive type the tank. per hour (km/h) or miles per hour
: Your vehicle’s current fuel This distance is estimated from the (mph) depending on the model.
mileage in kilometers per hour and fuel economy you have achieved
l/100 km. over the last few kilometers (miles), : Your vehicle’s average fuel
so it will vary with changes in speed, mileage since you last reset the trip
Right-hand drive type traffic condition, etc. computer A.
: Your vehicle’s current fuel
mileage in miles per hour and mpg. : The time travelled since : Your vehicle’s average fuel
you last turned the ignition switch to mileage since you last reset the trip
The display may show a current fuel the ON (II) position. computer B.
mileage reading higher than in
normal driving while the particulate The average fuel mileage is updated
matter (PM) is burnt and removed once per 10 seconds. When you reset
from the diesel particulate filter a trip meter, the average fuel
(DPF). For more information, see mileage for that trip meter also
page 534 . resets. To reset the values in the trip
computer, press and hold the SEL/
RESET button until the number
resets to ‘‘0.0.’’

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 107


06/09/13 17:07:50 32SWA600_113

Multi-Information Display

Odometer ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ will be
The odometer shows the total displayed when the average fuel
number of kilometers or miles your mileage is selected in the upper
vehicle has been driven. segment, depending on which trip
meter (trip A or trip B) is displayed
Trip Meter in the lower segment.
TRIP METER This meter shows the number of
ODOMETER kilometers or miles driven since you
last reset it.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR There are two trip meters: trip A and
Left-hand drive type is shown. trip B. To switch the display between
them, press the SEL/RESET button
The lower segment always shows repeatedly. When you turn the
the odometer, trip meter and the ignition switch to the ON (II)
outside temperature in the normal position, what you last selected is
display mode. displayed.

Each trip meter works independently,


so you can keep track of two
different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, and


then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’

108 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:07:57 32SWA600_114

Multi-Information Display

Outside Temperature Indicator If the outside temperature is


This indicator displays the outside incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
temperature in degrees Centigrade. it by up to ±3°C warmer or cooler
(see page 146 ).
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the NOTE: The temperature must be
temperature reading can be affected stabilized before doing this
by heat reflection from the road procedure.
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic. In certain weather conditions,
This can cause an incorrect temperature readings near freezing
temperature reading when your (0°C) could mean that ice is forming
speed is under 30 km/h (19 mph). on the road surface. You will also see
a caution symbol on the multi-
The sensor delays the display update information display (see page 119 ).
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.

Instruments and Controls 109


06/09/13 17:08:04 32SWA600_115

Multi-Information Display

System Warning Symbols message. SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR


If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example, the engine oil In this section, the system symbol
level is low or a door is not fully without message is used in almost all
closed, the multi-information display examples, and the same symbol(s)
will show you the problem. It does are used for a message.
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more symbols/ Usually, the symbols/messages are
messages. Most of the symbols/ shown in the upper and middle
messages are displayed for about 5 segments. If the adaptive cruise
seconds, and then the current control (ACC) or the collision
display returns. Some symbols/ mitigation brake system (CMBS) is
messages stay on until the problem selected, only the symbols are
is corrected. displayed in the middle segment and These symbols/messages also
the ACC or CMBS information is trigger the appropriate indicator(s)
When your vehicle is new, the multi- displayed in the upper segment. on the instrument panel and cause
information display shows the the system message indicator to
system warning symbols without the come on. The system message
message. This is the default setting indicator does not go off until the
when the vehicle leaves the factory. problem(s) are corrected.
You can customize this setting to see
the system warning symbols with The following pages describe each
messages (see page 145 ). Some system warning symbol/message
symbols such as the low outside that can be displayed. Here is a list of
temperature, rear seat belt reminder all messages:
indicator, etc., do not have a

110 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:08:16 32SWA600_116

Multi-Information Display

See pages
See pages See pages
122, 508 and
89 and 126. 117 and 214.
509.

See pages See pages See pages


122 and 503. 125 and 507. 118 and 421.

See pages See pages See pages


122 and 512. 123 and 511. 126 and 358.

See pages See pages See pages


121 and 505. 35 and 125. 126 and 378.

See pages See pages See pages


123 and 506. 125 and 366. 123 and 391.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 111


06/09/13 17:08:28 32SWA600_117

Multi-Information Display

See pages See pages See page


24 and 114. 291 and 301. 369.

See pages
See pages See pages
286, 301 and
24 and 114. 128 and 303.
371.

See pages See pages See pages


25 and 115. 120 and 289. 124 and 535.

See pages See pages See pages


127 and 168. 120 and 289. 124 and 536.

See pages See pages See page


128 and 285. 128 and 368. 116.

112 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:08:36 32SWA600_118

Multi-Information Display

See pages See pages


94 and 118. 119 and 133.

See pages See pages


117 and 177. 119 and 133.

Petrol
See pages models
127 and 426. See pages
96 and 118.
Diesel
See pages models
109 and 119. See pages
96 and 118.

See pages
127 and 165.

Instruments and Controls 113


06/09/13 17:08:43 32SWA600_119

Multi-Information Display

Fasten Seat Belt Fasten Passenger Seat Belt For more information of the seat belt
reminder indicator, see page 24 .

In addition to the seat belt reminder The multi-information display also


indicator in the instrument panel, the interrupts the current display and
current display is interrupted and the shows this symbol ‘‘ ,’’ or this
multi-information display shows this symbol with a ‘‘FASTEN
symbol ‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with PASSENGER SEAT BELT’’ message
a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ message if a front seat passenger does not
if you do not fasten your seat belt fasten their seat belt while driving.
while driving. This symbol/message This symbol/message remains
remains displayed if you ignore it displayed if a passenger ignores it
and do not wear your seat belt while and does not wear the seat belt while
the vehicle is moving. the vehicle is moving.

114 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:08:51 32SWA600_120

Multi-Information Display

Rear Seat Belt Use Monitor


When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the middle
segment of the multi-information
display shows the rear seat belt use.

This monitor goes off after about 30


seconds. It will also go off when you
change the display by pressing the
INFO button ( ) on the steering
wheel.
Seat belts in right and centre
positions are used.

The seat belt system detects any The system shows you how many
seat belt use of all three rear seat rear seat belts are being used and
seating positions according to the reminds you and your passengers to
activation of each seat belt retractor. fasten their seat belts. According to
the rear seat belt use (1 through 3),
you will see the indicator(s)
highlighted on the right side of the
middle segment.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 115


06/12/07 11:37:26 32SWA600_121

Multi-Information Display

Door and Tailgate Open

The seat belt indicator


system judges the use of the
seat belt based on the
amount of seat belt pulled
out from the retractor. It is
not an indicator to show that
the seat belt is actually
latched. Correct latching of
the seat belts should be
confirmed whenever the
indicator shows a seat belt is This shows all doors and tailgate open.
in use.
If the system cannot detect the seat If the tailgate or any door(s) is not
belt use, you will see three dashes. closed tightly, this monitor display
While driving, you can also confirm Turn the ignition switch to the indicates you which door or the
the rear seat belt use. Press and LOCK (0) position to reset the tailgate is not closed tightly, and
release the INFO button ( ) system. If this happens, the SRS reminds you to close the tailgate or
repeatedly to change the display. indicator also comes on. Have your the door(s) before you start driving.
vehicle checked by your dealer (see This display continues until you
page 35 ). close the door(s) and the tailgate.

116 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:09:04 32SWA600_122

Multi-Information Display

Pressing the INFO button on the Release Parking Brake Ignition Key
steering wheel momentarily changes
the display, but it will come back
after about 5 seconds.

If you start driving without releasing If you leave the key in the ignition
the parking brake, the current switch in the LOCK (0) or
display is interrupted and the multi- ACCESSORY (I) position and open
information display shows this the driver’s door, you will see this
symbol, or this symbol with a symbol, or this symbol with/a
‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’ ‘‘IGNITION KEY’’ message in the
message. This symbol/message display and hear a reminder beeper.
continues, and a chime sounds, until
you release the parking brake.

Instruments and Controls 117


06/09/13 17:09:13 32SWA600_123

Multi-Information Display

Brake Fluid Low Fuel Low Diesel Fuel Low

If the brake fluid level is at or below On petrol models On diesel models


the MIN mark on the side of the If the level of the fuel in the tank If the level of the fuel in the tank
brake fluid reservoir in the engine gets low, you will see this symbol, or gets low, you will see this symbol, or
compartment, you will see this this symbol with a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’ this symbol with a ‘‘DIESEL FUEL
symbol, or this symbol with a message on the display, and you LOW’’ message on the display, and
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message. If must refuel soon. The low fuel you must refuel soon. The low fuel
you see this message, have the brake indicator in the instrument panel will indicator in the instrument panel will
system checked by your dealer (see also come on (see page 96 ). also come on (see page 96 ).
page 421 ).

118 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:09:20 32SWA600_124

Multi-Information Display

Headlights On Speed Alarm Low Outside Temperature

Alarm at vehicle speed 80 km/h is set.

If you turn the ignition switch to the If you set the speed alarm function in If the outside temperature is very
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) the custom settings, you will see this low (near freezing) and there is a
position without turning off the indicator and hear a beep when the risk that the road surface is iced over,
headlights or position lights, and vehicle speed reaches the set speed. you will see this symbol on the multi-
open the driver’s door, you will see You can set two different speeds for function display. For more
this symbol, or this symbol with a the alarm. For more information to information of the outside
‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message on set the speed alarm, see page 133 . temperature indicator, see page 109 .
the display. The lights on indicator in
the instrument panel also comes on
and stays on. You will also hear a
reminder chime.

Instruments and Controls 119


06/09/13 17:09:25 32SWA600_125

Multi-Information Display

Shift Up/Shift Down Indications

Shift up

Shift down

On vehicles with adaptive cruise control


(ACC)
Manual transmission only
Either the shift up or shift down
indication comes on to show you the
appropriate time to change a higher
or lower gear when the adaptive
cruise control system is activated.
For more information, see page 289 .

120 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:09:32 32SWA600_126

Multi-Information Display

System Warnings Check Engine Oil Level


The following symbols/messages
indicate various problems in your If you ignore the oil level symbol/
vehicle’s systems. message and keep driving with this
symbol/message on, you can
You will also hear a beep when the seriously damage the engine.
symbol or the symbol with a
message is displayed on the multi-
information display at the first time.

If this symbol or this symbol with a


‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’
message comes on on the multi-
information display when the engine
is running, the engine oil level is low.
You will also hear a beep with this
symbol/message on. You should
check the oil level and add engine oil.
For more information, see page 505 .

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 121


06/09/13 17:09:40 32SWA600_127

Multi-Information Display

Oil Pressure Low Check System (Engine) Check System (Brake)

If the engine oil is very low or has If you see this symbol or this symbol If there is a problem with the brake
lost pressure, you will see this with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message system (including the front-to-rear
symbol or this symbol with an ‘‘OIL on the multi-information display, it barking distribution system), you
PRESSURE LOW’’ message on the means one of the engine’s emissions will see this symbol or this symbol
multi-information display. You will systems may have a problem. Have with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message
also see the low oil pressure your vehicle checked by a dealer on the multi-information display. The
indicator in the instrument panel (see page 508 on petrol models and parking brake and brake system
flashing or staying on. If you see this page 509 on diesel models). indicator in the instrument panel will
symbol/message, you should take also come on. For more information,
immediate action since serious see page 512 .
engine damage is possible. Follow
the procedure on page 503 .

122 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:09:49 32SWA600_128

Multi-Information Display

Check System (Engine Oil Level Check System (PGM-FI) Check System (Trailer Stability
Sensor) Assist)

Diesel models only


If there is a problem with the engine If there is a problem with the engine If there is a problem with the brake
oil level sensor system, you will see control system, you will see this lighting system, the trailer stability
this symbol or this symbol with a symbol or this symbol with a assist function shuts down and you
‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the will see this symbol or this symbol
multi-information display. If you multi-information display. If you with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message
ignore this symbol/message and ignore this symbol/message and on the multi-information display. For
continue driving, the system will be continue driving, the engine control more information of the trailer
seriously damaged. For more system will be seriously damaged. stability assist function, see page
information, see page 506 . For more information, see page 511 . 390 .

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 123


06/09/13 17:09:57 32SWA600_129

Multi-Information Display

DPF (Regeneration Required) DPF (Check System) If you ignore this symbol/message
and continue driving, the DPF and
your vehicle’s emission control
systems will be seriously damaged.
For more information on the DPF
system, see page 534 .

Diesel models with DPF (Diesel Diesel models with DPF (Diesel
Particulate Filter) Particulate Filter)
If you see this symbol or this symbol If you see this symbol or this symbol
with a ‘‘DPF REGENERATION with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message
REQUIRED’’ message on the multi- on the multi-information display
information display while the engine while the engine is running, it means
is running, it means the diesel the diesel particulate filter (DPF) is
particulate filter (DPF) should be clogged with accumulated
regenerated to remove the particulate matter (PM) and it
accumulated particulate matter (PM). should be checked, then repaired or
For more information on the DPF replace. Take your vehicle to a
system, see page 534 . Honda dealer as soon as possible.

124 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:10:05 32SWA600_130

Multi-Information Display

Check System (Charging System) Check System (Airbag System) Check System (ABS System)

If you see this symbol or this symbol If there is a problem with your front If there is a problem with the anti-
with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message airbags, side airbags, automatic seat lock brake system (ABS), you will
on the multi-information display, it belt tensioners, or side curtain see this symbol or this symbol with a
means the battery is not being airbags, you will see this symbol or ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the
charged. For more information, see this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK multi-information display. Have your
page 507 . SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- vehicle checked by a dealer (see
information display. Take your page 86 ).
vehicle to a dealer as soon as
possible (see page 35 ).

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 125


06/09/13 17:10:14 32SWA600_131

Multi-Information Display

Check System (Automatic Check System (EPS) Check System (VSA)


Transmission) (For some types)

If there is a problem with the vehicle


On vehicles with automatic transmission If there is a problem with the electric stability assist (VSA) system, you
If there is a problem with the power steering (EPS) system, you will see this symbol or this symbol
automatic transmission, you will see will see this symbol or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message
this symbol or this symbol with a with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ on the on the multi-information display. The
‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. The EPS VSA system and VSA activation
multi-information. Avoid rapid system indicator in the instrument indicators in the instrument panel
acceleration, and have the panel will also come on. If you see will also come on. If you see this
transmission checked by a dealer as this symbol/message, have the EPS symbol/message, have the VSA
soon as possible. system checked by your dealer. For system checked by your dealer. For
more information, see page 89 . more information, see page 378 .

126 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:10:23 32SWA600_132

Multi-Information Display

Water In Fuel Filter Check System (Automatic Check System (Adaptive Front
Headlights On) Lighting System)
(For some types)

Diesel models only


If this symbol or this symbol with a On vehicles with automatic lighting
‘‘WATER IN FUEL FILTER’’ shows feature If there is a problem with the
on the multi-information display, If you see this symbol or this symbol adaptive front lighting (AFS) system,
water stays in the fuel system which with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message the AFS indicator comes on in the
may cause damage to the fuel on the multi-information display, it instrument panel and you will also
injection system. Contact your dealer means there is a problem with the see this symbol or this symbol with a
as soon as possible and have the fuel automatic headlights on control ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the
filter checked to drain off water. system. If you see this symbol/ multi-information display. For more
message, have the vehicle checked information, see page 168 .
by your dealer as soon as possible.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 127


06/09/21 18:44:19 32SWA600_133

Multi-Information Display

Check System (Adaptive Cruise Check System (Collision Mitigation Check System (Parking Sensor
Control) Brake System) System)
(For some types) (For some types) (For some types)

If there is a problem with the If there is a problem with the If there is a problem with the
adaptive cruise control (ACC) collision mitigation brake system parking sensor system, you will see
system, the ACC indicator comes on (CMBS), the CMBS indicator comes this symbol or this symbol with a
amber in the instrument panel and on in the instrument panel and you ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the
you will also see this symbol or this will also see this symbol or this multi-information. Have the parking
symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ sensor system checked by your
message on the multi-information message on the multi-information dealer. For more information of how
display. For more information, see display. For more information, see to activate the parking sensors, see
page 285 . page 368 . page 303 .

128 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:10:43 32SWA600_134

Multi-Information Display

Customized Settings
You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to suit your needs. The table shows the settings you can
customize.
Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page
SPEED ALARM SPEED ALARM 1 (ON/OFF, Setting) Sets the speed alarm on and changes the alarm ON/OFF*2 133
(P.133) SPEED ALARM 2 (ON/OFF, Setting) speed setting. over 5 km/h (mph) with
5 km/h (mph) steps
SPEED ALARM 1 (ON/OFF)*1 Sets the speed alarm on. ON/OFF*2 136
SPEED ALARM 2 (ON/OFF)*1
CHG SETTING ACC PRE-RUNNING CAR Sets the beep to sound when the system detects a ON/OFF*2 141
(P.138) SETUP DETECT BEEP vehicle ahead of you.
ACC DISPLAY SPEED Changes the displayed measurement with the km/h*3 142
UNIT ACC on. mph*3
METER WARNING MESSAGE Switches warning message to be displayed or not. ON/OFF*2 145
SETUP ADJUST OUTSIDE Changes the outside temperature reading above up to ±3°C 146
TEMP. DISPLAY or below its current reading. 0°C*2
PRIMARY DISP. Changes the primary displayed trip computer item Current fuel mileage*2, Average 148
SELECTION in the upper segment. fuel mileage, Elapsed time,
Range, Average speed
TRIP A RESET WITH Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy ON/OFF*2 150
REFUEL to reset when you refuel.
ELAPSED TIME RESET Resets the elapsed time of your current trip. IGN OFF*2, TRIP A, TRIP B 151

* 1 : Setting is available while driving.


* 2 : Factory default setting
* 3 : Default setting is what you last selected.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls 129
06/09/13 17:10:49 32SWA600_135

Multi-Information Display

Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page


LANGUAGE Changes the language used in the display. ENGLISH*, ITALIAN, 154
(P.154) SPANISH, GERMAN,
FRENCH, PORTUGUESE
DEFAULT ALL Resets all customized settings to the factory CANCEL * 155
(P.155) default. OK

* : Factory default setting

130 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:10:58 32SWA600_136

Multi-Information Display

To enter the customizing mode, the


vehicle must be stopped with the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position and the parking brake is set
on vehicles with manual
transmission. If your vehicle has the
automatic transmission, the shift
lever should be in park.
(Exceptionally, this condition is not
applied on some speed alarm
settings.) Press and hold the INFO
button ( ) on the steering wheel for
about 3 seconds while the multi-
information display is in its normal
display. Here are the settings you
can customize. : Press the
INFO button.
SPEED ALARM: To set the speed
alarm (see page 133 ). DEFAULT ALL: To return to the Each time you press the INFO
default settings (see page 155 ). button, the display switches from
CHG SETTING: To change ‘‘SPEED ALARM’’, ‘‘CHG
vehicle control settings (see page SETTING’’, ‘‘LANGUAGE’’,
138 ). ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’, ‘‘EXIT’’, and then
back to ‘‘SPEED ALARM’’ as shown
LANGUAGE: To select language above.
(see page 154 ). CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 131


06/09/13 17:11:07 32SWA600_137

Multi-Information Display

If you set the alarm to the specified If you do not select any settings on Customizing is also cancelled, if you
vehicle speed while driving, select the display after you press the INFO turn the ignition switch out of the
‘‘SPEED ALARM,’’ and refer to page button and the setting menu is ON (II) position or release the
133 . Exceptionally, you can also displayed, the customizing mode parking brake (M/T) or move the
select the specified speed alarm display will return to the normal shift lever out of Park (A/T).
while driving. display after about 10 seconds.
If you select and press the
If you want to change any vehicle SEL/RESET button, the normal
control settings, select ‘‘CHG display is shown again.
SETTING,’’ and follow the
instructions on page 138 .

If you want the settings as they were


when the vehicle left the factory,
select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ as
described on page 155 .

Use the INFO button ( ) on the


steering wheel to see and scroll
through the settings, and the SEL/ If you try to start driving while
RESET button to enter your customizing the settings, you will see
selections. the above display a few seconds and
then the customizing will be
cancelled.

132 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:11:14 32SWA600_138

Multi-Information Display

Speed Alarm To set the speed alarm while the vehicle


You can access different alarm is stopped:
functions when the vehicle is
stopped or while driving. While
driving, you can select either of the Speed setting 1 off is selected.
two speed alarm settings. When your
vehicle is stopped, you can customize
the setting speed to your preference.

Press and hold the INFO button to On the left-hand drive type, you can
enter the customizing mode, then set the speed alarm in km/h. On the
press and release the INFO button right-hand drive type, you can set the
repeatedly to select ‘‘SPEED speed alarm in mph. The two speed
ALARM.’’ While the multi- selections and the on/off setting
information display is showing icons are displayed.
‘‘SPEED ALARM,’’ press the SEL/
RESET button. The display changes
to the setting mode.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 133


06/09/13 17:11:22 32SWA600_139

Multi-Information Display

Speed setting 1: You can set the


alarm on or off, and adjust the
setting speeds above or below
50 km/h (30 mph). Alarm off Alarm on

Speed setting 2: You can set the


alarm on or off, and adjust the
setting speeds above or below
80 km/h (50 mph).

Each time you press and release the


INFO button ( ), the selected
icon is changed from set 1, to 50
km/h (30 mph), and to set 2, to 80
km/h (50 mph). Then press the
INFO button again to exit. Select either of the setting modes (1 To adjust the setting speed, select
or 2), then select on or off by either of the setting speeds, then
pressing the SEL/RESET button press and release the SEL/RESET
repeatedly. button. The display changes to the
speed setting screen.

134 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:11:28 32SWA600_140

Multi-Information Display

Each time you press the SEL/ After your selection, press and
RESET button, the setting speed release the INFO button to move to
increases or decreases by 5 km/h the exit mode. Press the SEL/
(mph). You can set the speed values RESET button to enter your setting.
over 5 km/h (5 mph) with 5 km/h If you press the INFO button, the
(mph) steps. Always follow the display goes back to the setting
posted speed limit and never drive mode. Repeat the setup.
faster than is safe for the traffic
conditions.

To enter your selection, select the


SET icon by pressing the INFO
button, then press and hold the SEL/
RESET button.

The displayed number is the current


speed setting. Select either the + or
− icon by pressing the INFO button
repeatedly, then press the SEL/
RESET button to change the setting
value.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 135


06/09/13 17:11:36 32SWA600_141

Multi-Information Display

To select the alarm speed while driving: INFO button, the selected icon is
changed between the setting speeds
and the exit icon.

Press the INFO button for about 1 Alarm off Alarm on


To exit the customizing mode, select second to switch the display. You will
the exit mode shown above by see the speed alarm settings on the Select the desired setting speed,
pressing the INFO button repeatedly, multi-information display. then press the SEL/RESET button.
then press the SEL/RESET button. Each time you press the SEL/
The display goes back to the normal According to the selected display, RESET button, the selected speed
display. you can select the alarm speed icon switches between on and off.
between the two setting speeds:
50 km/h and 80 km/h in the left-
hand drive type, or 30 mph and 50
mph in the right-hand drive type.
Each time you press and release the

136 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:11:41 32SWA600_142

Multi-Information Display

After your selection, press and


release the INFO button to move to
the exit mode. Press the SEL/
RESET button to enter your setting.
If you press the INFO button, the
display goes back to the setting
mode. Repeat the setup. Alarm on

After pressing the SEL/RESET


button, the display shows your
setting for a few seconds, then goes
back to the normal display.

If you do not press any button, the


display returns to the normal display
after about 10 seconds.

Instruments and Controls 137


06/09/13 17:11:47 32SWA600_143

Multi-Information Display

Change Setting
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. On vehicles with
adaptive cruise control (ACC)
system, the change setting consists
of the two main items; ACC Setup
and Meter Setup, and each main
item has some custom settings. On
the other vehicles, the change
setting consists of all items in the
meter setup menu. The following
items are the settings you can
customize.

Go to the ACC Go to the Meter


Setup Customize Setup Customize
Setting Display* Setting Display
(see page 140). (see page 144).

*: ACC Setup is available on vehicles with adaptive cruise control.

138 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:11:52 32SWA600_144

Multi-Information Display

Press and hold the INFO button to


enter the customizing mode, then
press and release the INFO button
repeatedly to select ‘‘CHG SETTING.’’
While the multi-information display
is showing ‘‘CHG SETTING,’’ press
the SEL/RESET button. The display
changes to the setting mode.

Press and release the INFO button


repeatedly until you see the setup
you want to customize, and press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection. Each time you press the To exit the customizing mode after
INFO button, the display changes as your selection, select the exit mode
shown. To customize each setting, shown above by pressing the INFO
follow the procedures described on button repeatedly, then press the
the following pages. SEL/RESET button. The display will
return to the normal display.

Instruments and Controls 139


06/09/13 17:11:59 32SWA600_145

Multi-Information Display

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Setup


You can customize either of the
adaptive cruise control (ACC)
system settings to your preference.
Here are the settings you can
customize.

ACC Setup
PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT
BEEP: You can turn on or off the
alarm when the system detects a
vehicle ahead of you (see page
141 ).

ACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT:


Measurements in the ACC display
can be selected; km or miles (see
page 142 ).
: Press the INFO button.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.

140 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:12:06 32SWA600_146

Multi-Information Display

Pre-Running Car Detect Beep

On vehicles with adaptive cruise control You can select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’. Each When your selection is successfully
(ACC) time you press the INFO button, the completed, the display shows
With this setting on, a beep sounds selected mode switches between on ‘‘SETUP ON’’ for a few seconds,
when the system detects a vehicle and off. Enter your selection by then goes back to the ‘‘CHG
ahead of you. You will also hear a pressing the SEL/RESET button. SETTING’’ display. Press the SEL/
beep when the vehicle goes out of RESET button, then press the INFO
the range of your vehicle’s radar button repeatedly to select another
sensor. While the multi-information customizing mode.
display is showing ‘‘PRE-RUNNING
CAR DETECT BEEP,’’ press the
SEL/RESET button. The display
changes to the setting display. CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 141


06/09/13 17:12:15 32SWA600_147

Multi-Information Display

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Display Speed Unit

If you fail to enter your selection, To exit the customizing mode, select
you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on the the exit mode by pressing the INFO On vehicles with adaptive cruise control
display for a few seconds. The button repeatedly, then press the (ACC)
display returns to the setting mode. SEL/RESET button. The display The speed unit measurements of the
Repeat the setup. goes back to the ‘‘PRE-RUNNING adaptive cruise control can be
CAR DETECT BEEP’’ display. selected; km/h or mph.

To return to the normal display, While the multi-information display


select the display, then press is showing ‘‘ACC DISPLAY SPEED
the SEL/RESET button. UNIT,’’ press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes to the
setting display.

142 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:12:21 32SWA600_148

Multi-Information Display

If you fail to enter your selection,


you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on the
display for a few seconds. The
display returns to the setting mode.
Repeat the setup.

To exit this mode without changing


the current setting, select ,
and press the SEL/RESET button.

You can select ‘‘km/h’’ or ‘‘mph’’. When your selection is successfully


The highlighted item is the current completed, the display shows
setting. Each time you press the ‘‘SETUP km/h’’ for a few seconds,
INFO button, the selected item then goes back to the ‘‘CHG
changes. Enter your selection by SETTING’’ display. Press the SEL/
pressing the SEL/RESET button. RESET button, then press the INFO
button repeatedly to select another
customizing mode.

Instruments and Controls 143


06/09/19 17:13:29 32SWA600_149

Multi-Information Display

Meter Setup
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to suit your
needs. The following items are the
settings you can customize.

WARNING MESSAGE: The


warning message is displayed with
the symbol or not (see page 145 ).

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.


DISPLAY: The outside
temperature indicator value is
adjustable up to + or −3°C (see
page 146 ).

PRIMARY DISP SELECTION: A : Press the INFO button.


trip computer item displayed in
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
the upper segment can be selected
(see page 148 ).
TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL: ELAPSED TIME RESET: The
Average fuel mileage for trip elapsed time can be reset when
meter A can be reset after you turn the ignition switch to the
refueling (see page 150 ). OFF (0) position or when you
reset the trip meter A or B (see
page 151 ).

144 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:12:37 32SWA600_150

Multi-Information Display

Warning Message

You can see message(s) with the You can select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’. Each When your selection is successfully
system warning symbol on the multi- time you press the INFO button, the completed, the display shows
information display. While the multi- selected mode switches between on ‘‘SETUP ON’’ for a few seconds,
information display is showing and off. Enter your selection by then goes back to the ‘‘CHG
‘‘WARNING MESSAGE,’’ press the pressing the SEL/RESET button. SETTING’’ display. Press the SEL/
SEL/RESET button. The display RESET button, then press the INFO
changes to the setting display. button repeatedly to select another
customizing mode.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 145


06/09/13 17:12:44 32SWA600_151

Multi-Information Display

To exit the customizing mode, select Outside Temperature Display


the exit mode by pressing the INFO Adjustment
button repeatedly, then press the If you find that the temperature
SEL/RESET button (see page 139 ). reading is always a few degrees
The display goes back to the below or above the actual
‘‘WARNING MESSAGE’’ display. temperature, adjust it as described
on the following columns.
To return to the normal display,
select the display, then press
the SEL/RESET button.

If you fail to enter your selection,


you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on the
display for a few seconds. The
display returns to the setting mode.
Repeat the setup.

146 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:12:51 32SWA600_152

Multi-Information Display

While the multi-information display The highlighted number is the When your selection is successfully
is showing ‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE current adjustment above or below completed, the display shows
TEMP. DISPLAY,’’ press the SEL/ the outside temperature. Select ‘‘SETUP ± °C’’ for a few seconds,
RESET button. The display changes either + or − icon by pressing the then goes back to the ‘‘CHG
to the setting display. INFO button repeatedly then press SETTING’’ display. Press the SEL/
the SEL/RESET button to change RESET button, then press the INFO
the setting value. You can select the button repeatedly to select another
value between 0, +1, +2, +3, and 0, customizing mode.
−1, −2, −3. To enter your selection,
select the SET icon by pressing the
INFO button, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 147


06/09/13 17:13:02 32SWA600_153

Multi-Information Display

If you fail to enter your selection, Primary Disp Selection Here are the settings you can
you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on the You can select a trip computer item customize:
display for a few seconds. The displayed in the upper segment. The
display returns to the setting mode. trip computer consists of the current : Current fuel mileage
Repeat the setup. fuel mileage, the average fuel
economy, the estimated distance, the : Estimated distance
To exit the customizing mode, select elapsed time, and the average speed.
the exit mode by pressing the INFO The upper segment always displays : Average fuel mileage
button repeatedly, then press the one of the trip computer items as a
SEL/RESET button. The display primary display when you turn the : Time travelled since you
goes back to the normal display. ignition switch to the ON (II) last turned the ignition switch to the
position. This selected item in the ON (II) position
upper segment does not switch even
if you press the INFO button. For : Average speed
more information of each trip
computer items, see page 107 .

148 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:13:09 32SWA600_154

Multi-Information Display

While the multi-information display You can select each trip computer When your selection is successfully
is showing ‘‘PRIMARY DIPS symbol. Each time you press the completed, the display shows the
SELECTION,’’ press the SEL/ INFO button, the selected symbol appropriate symbol with a ‘‘SETUP’’
RESET button. The display changes switches between them. Enter your message for a few seconds, then
to the setting display. selection by pressing the SEL/ goes back to the ‘‘CHG SETTING’’
RESET button. display. Press the SEL/RESET
button, then press the INFO button
repeatedly to select another
customizing mode.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 149


06/09/13 17:13:16 32SWA600_155

Multi-Information Display

If you fail to enter your selection, Trip A Reset With Refuel


you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on the
display for a few seconds. The
display returns to the setting mode.
Repeat the setup.

If you select and press the


SEL/RESET button, the normal
display is shown again.

To cause the trip meter A and the You can select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’. Each
average fuel mileage for trip A to time you press the INFO button, the
reset every time you refuel your selected mode switches between on
vehicle, adjust it as described as and off. Enter your selection by
follows. pressing the SEL/RESET button.

While the multi-information display


is showing ‘‘TRIP A RESET WITH
REFUEL,’’ press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes to the
setting display.

150 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:13:24 32SWA600_156

Multi-Information Display

If you fail to enter your selection, Elapsed Time Reset


you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on the
display for a few seconds. The
display returns to the setting mode.
Repeat the setup.

To exit the customizing mode, select


the exit mode by pressing the INFO
button repeatedly, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The display will
return to the normal display.

When your selection is successfully To cause the elapsed time to reset


completed, the display shows every time you turn the ignition
‘‘SETUP ON’’ or ‘‘SETUP OFF’’ for a switch to the LOCK (0) position or
few seconds, then goes back to the reset the trip meter A or B, adjust it
‘‘CHG SETTING’’ display. Press the as described as follows.
SEL/RESET button, then press the
INFO button repeatedly to select While the multi-information display
another customizing mode. is showing ‘‘ELAPSED TIME
RESET,’’ press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes to the
setting display.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 151


06/09/13 17:13:31 32SWA600_157

Multi-Information Display

IGN OFF: The elapsed time is reset


when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position.

TRIP A: The elapsed time is reset


when you reset the trip meter A.

TRIP B: The elapsed time is reset


when you reset the trip meter B.

IGN OFF is selected.

You can select ‘‘IGN OFF,’’ When your selection is successfully


‘‘TRIP A,’’ or ‘‘TRIP B’’. Each time completed, the display shows the
you press the INFO button, the appropriate setting; ‘‘SETTING IGN
selected mode switches between OFF,’’ ‘‘SETUP TRIP A,’’ or ‘‘SETUP
them. Enter your selection by TRIP B’’ for a few seconds, then
pressing the SEL/RESET button. goes back to the ‘‘CHG SETTING’’
display. Press the SEL/RESET
button, then press the INFO button
repeatedly to select another
customizing mode.

152 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:13:35 32SWA600_158

Multi-Information Display

If you fail to enter your selection,


you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on the
display for a few seconds. The
display returns to the setting mode.
Repeat the setup.

To exit the customizing mode, select


the exit mode by pressing the INFO
button repeatedly, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The display
goes back to the normal display.

Instruments and Controls 153


06/09/13 17:13:42 32SWA600_159

Multi-Information Display

Selecting Language

ENGLISH is selected.

Press and hold the INFO button to You can select any of the following When the language selection is
enter the customizing mode, then languages: English, French, German, successfully completed, the display
press and release the INFO button to Spanish, Italian, Portuguese. Press changes to the screen shown above
select ‘‘LANGUAGE.’’ While the and release the INFO button to for a few seconds, then goes back to
multi-information display is showing select the language, then press the the ‘‘LANGUAGE’’ display. Press the
‘‘LANGUAGE,’’ press the SEL/ SEL/RESET button to enter the INFO button repeatedly to select
RESET button. The display changes selection. another customizing mode.
to the setting display.

154 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:13:49 32SWA600_160

Multi-Information Display

Default Settings

If you fail to set the language setting, To exit the customizing mode, select If you want to set the customizable
you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on the the exit mode shown above by vehicle control settings to the default
display for a few seconds. The pressing the INFO button repeatedly, setting, press the INFO button on
display returns to the setting mode. then press the SEL/RESET button. the steering wheel repeatedly until
Repeat the setup. The display goes back to the normal ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is displayed, then
display. press the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 155


06/09/13 17:13:55 32SWA600_161

Multi-Information Display

The display shows the selectable To set the default settings, select After the DEFAULT ALL operation
items. If you want to cancel ‘‘OK’’ by pressing the INFO button, is completed, you will see the above
‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ select ‘‘CANCEL’’ then press and hold the SEL/RESET display for a few seconds, then the
by pressing the INFO button, then button for about 3 seconds to set. display switches to the language
press and hold the SEL/RESET setting mode.
button for about 3 seconds to set.
The display goes back to the normal
display.

156 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:14:05 32SWA600_162

Multi-Information Display

The following are the default values Displayed language is English.


for each customizable setting.
Selecting the default setting is
The speed alarm function is off. cancelled.

The warning message function is On vehicles with adaptive cruise control


off. Only the symbols are (ACC)
displayed on the multi-information A beep will not sound when the
display. system detects a vehicle ahead of
your vehicle.
Outside temperature display
adjustment value is 0°C. Measurements in the ACC display
are km/h on the left-hand drive
The primary display in the upper type and mph on the right-hand
If the DEFAULT ALL operation is segment is the current fuel drive type.
not successful, you will see the above mileage.
display for a few seconds, then the
display goes back to the setting Average fuel mileage for trip
display. meter A is not reset on refueling.

The elapsed time is reset with the


ignition switch in the LOCK (0)
position.

Instruments and Controls 157


06/09/13 17:14:13 32SWA600_163

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Left-hand drive type


REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS*2 INSTRUMENT PANEL
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/ (P.274) BRIGHTNESS (P.170)
FRONT FOG LIGHTS*2/ WINDSCREEN WIPERS/
REAR FOG LIGHT WASHERS (P.160)
(P.164, 166, 167)
HAZARD WARNING
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST BUTTON
(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH (P.171)
(P.379)
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER*2
(P.173)
REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH*2 (P.171, 213)
(P.169)
VSA SYSTEM OFF SWITCH*3 PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM BUTTON
(P.379) (P.303)
CMBS OFF SWITCH*2
(P.371) HORN*1 CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS*2 (P.282)
HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE TILT/TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT
SYSTEM BUTTONS*2 (P.174)
(P.309) ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM BUTTONS*2
(P.285)
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS*2 MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS
(P.105)

*1 : To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
*2 : If equipped
*3 : On vehicles with headlight adjuster
158 Instruments and Controls
06/09/13 17:14:21 32SWA600_164

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Right-hand drive type


INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSCREEN WIPERS/
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON BRIGHTNESS WASHERS
(P.171) (P.170) (P.160)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/ VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST


FRONT FOG LIGHTS*2/ (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
REAR FOG LIGHT (P.379)
(P.164, 166, 167) HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER*2
(P.173)
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS*2
(P.274) ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH*2
(P.169)
REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON VSA SYSTEM OFF SWITCH*3 (P.309)
(P.171, 213) CMBS OFF SWITCH*2 (P.371)

PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM BUTTON HORN*1 CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS*2


(P.303) (P.282)
TILT/TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT
(P.174) ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS*2 SYSTEM BUTTONS*2 (P.285)
HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE SYSTEM MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS
BUTTONS*2 (P.309) (P.105)

*1 : To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
*2 : If equipped
*3 : On vehicles with headlight adjuster
Instruments and Controls 159
06/09/13 17:14:33 32SWA600_165

Windscreen Wipers and Washers

Windscreen Wipers Push the lever up or down to select a While the vehicle is stopped and in
position. gear, the wipers sweep the
windscreen whenever you remove
MIST − The wipers run at high your foot from the brake pedal.
speed until you release the lever.
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
INT − The wipers operate every
few seconds. At low speed and Windscreen Washers − Pull the
high speed, the wipers run wiper control lever toward you,
continuously. and hold it. The washers spray
until you release the lever. The
On some types wipers run at low speed, then
1. MIST The length of the wiper interval is complete one more sweep after
2. OFF varied automatically according to you release the lever.
3. INT − Intermittent the vehicle’s speed.
(AUTO*)
4. LO − Low speed Vary the delay by turning the
5. HI − High speed INT TIME ring.
6. Windscreen washers
If you turn it to the shortest delay,
* : On vehicles with automatic the wipers will change to low
intermittent wipers, see page speed operation when the vehicle
161 . speed exceeds 20 km/h (12 mph).

160 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:14:42 32SWA600_166

Windscreen Wipers and Washers

Headlight Washer Automatic Intermittent Wipers When the system senses rainfall, it
(For some types) On some types turns on the windscreen wipers and
When you pull back on the wiper varies their speed (intermittent, low
control lever with the headlight speed, or high speed) depending on
switch ON, the headlight washers how hard it is raining. This function
and windscreen washers work at the is available when the vehicle speed
same time. exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).

The headlight washers use the same When the wiper lever is in the ‘‘LO’’
fluid reservoir as the windscreen (low speed) or ‘‘HI’’ (high speed)
washers. position, the windscreen wipers run
at that speed. Automatic sensing is
disabled.

The automatic intermittent wiper


system senses rainfall and
automatically turns on the
windscreen wipers. To enable
sensing, push the lever down to
select AUTO.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 161


06/09/13 17:14:47 32SWA600_167

Windscreen Wipers and Washers

Do not position the wiper lever in


RAINFALL SENSOR AUTO when driving through a car
wash. Turn off this system when not
in use.

AUTO SENSITIVE RING

You can adjust the sensitivity of the The rainfall sensor is located in the
system by turning the AUTO windscreen near the rearview mirror.
sensitive ring on the wiper lever. If the sensor is covered with mud, oil,
dust, etc., the wipers may not
operate properly or may operate
unexpectedly.

162 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:14:56 32SWA600_168

Windscreen Wipers and Washers

Rear Window Wiper and Washer 3. Hold past ON to activate the rear
window wiper a few times and to
spray the rear window washer.

4. Rotate the switch anticlockwise


also to spray the window washer
and turn the wiper on.

When you shift the transmission to


the reverse position with the front
windscreen wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically even if
the rear wiper switch is off.

1. OFF With the front wiper in INT or


When you turn the wiper switch to AUTO position, the rear wiper
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will operates intermittently. If the front
return to its parked position. wiper is set to the LO or HI position,
the rear wiper runs continuously.
2. Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON. The rear window washer uses the
The wiper operates every 7 same fluid reservoir as the
seconds after completing two windscreen washer.
sweeps.

Instruments and Controls 163


06/09/13 17:15:05 32SWA600_169

Turn Signals and Headlights

Turn Signal − Push down or up on Headlights On − Turning the


the lever to signal a turn. To signal a switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
lane change, push lightly on the on the position lights, tail-lights,
lever in the proper direction and hold instrument panel lights, and rear
it. The lever will return to centre licence plate lights.
when you release it or complete a
turn. Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights. If
One-push Turn Signal you leave the lights on with the key
To signal a lane change easily, push removed from the ignition switch,
the turn signal lever in the proper you will hear a reminder chime when
direction lightly and release it. The you open the driver’s door.
left or right turn signal indicator on
1. Turn signal the instrument panel and the When the light switch is in the
2. Off appropriate outside turn signals will ‘‘ ’’ or the ‘‘ ’’ position, the
3. Position and interior lights blink three times. lights on indicator comes on as a
4. AUTO (on some models) reminder.
5. Headlights on If you hold the turn signal lever, the
6. High beams turn signal continues to blink and On vehicles with multi-information
7. Flash high beams will stop when you release it. display
You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’
or this symbol with a
‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message on
the multi-information display.

164 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:15:16 32SWA600_170

Headlights

High Beams − Push the lever On some models Even with the automatic lighting
forward until you hear a click to turn AUTO − The automatic lighting feature turned on, we recommend
on the high beams. The blue high feature turns on the headlights, all that you turn on the lights manually
beam indicator will come on (see other exterior lights, and the when driving at night or in a dense
page 94 ). Pull the lever back to instrument panel lights when it fog, or when you enter dark areas
return to the low beams. senses low ambient light. such as long tunnels or parking
facilities.
To flash the high beams, pull the To turn on the automatic lighting,
lever back lightly, then release it. turn the light switch to AUTO at any Do not leave the light switch in
The high beams will stay on as long time. The lights will come on AUTO if you will not be driving the
as you hold the lever back. automatically when the outside light vehicle for an extended period (a
level becomes low (at dusk, for week or more). You should also turn
Daytime Running Lights example). The lights on indicator off the lights if you plan to leave the
(For some types) comes on as a reminder. The lights engine idling or the engine off for a
The daytime running lights come on and indicator turn off automatically long time.
automatically when you turn the when the system senses high
ignition switch to the ON (II) ambient light. On vehicles with multi-information
position. They go out automatically display
when the light switch is turned to The lights turn off automatically If there is a problem with the control
the position. when you turn the ignition switch to system, you will see the symbol
the LOCK (0) position. To turn them ‘‘ ,’’ or the symbol with a
on again, either turn the ignition ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the
switch to the ON (II) position, or multi-information display. Have the
turn the light switch to position. vehicle checked by your dealer as
soon as possible.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 165


06/09/13 17:15:25 32SWA600_171

Headlights, Front and Rear Fog Lights

On vehicles with information display Rear Fog Light To operate the rear fog light, turn
If there is a problem with the (For some types) the switch up from the off ( )
automatic lighting control system, position. The indicator in the
the light control indicator comes on instrument panel comes on to
(see page 94 ). Have the vehicle indicate that the rear fog light is on.
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible. You can turn off the rear fog light
with the headlights on by turning the
LIGHTING SENSOR switch up again.

The rear fog light will go off when


you turn the headlights off. To turn
the rear fog light on again, you have
REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH to turn the rear fog light switch
again with the headlights on.
The rear fog light switch is located
next to the light control switch. You
can use the rear fog light when the
headlights are on (the light control
switch is in the position).
The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on the
windscreen near the rearview mirror.
Do not cover this sensor or spill
liquids on it.

166 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:15:36 32SWA600_172

Front and Rear Fog Lights

Front and Rear Fog Lights To turn on the rear fog light only, The front and rear fog lights will go
(For some types) turn the switch down from the off off when you turn the light control
( ) position. The indicator in switch off. With only the rear fog
the instrument panel comes on to light on, it will go off when you turn
indicate that the rear fog light is on. the headlights off.

You can turn off the rear fog light When you turn the light control
with the headlights on by turning the switch on again, the front fog lights
switch down again. will also turn on. To turn the fog
lights completely off, turn the fog
To operate the front fog lights, turn light switch down to the off ( )
the switch up from the off ( ) position.
position to the position. The
FRONT AND REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH
indicator comes on as a To turn the rear fog light on again,
reminder. To turn the rear fog light you have to turn the fog light switch
The fog light switch is located next on with the front fog lights, turn the again with the headlights on
to the light control switch. You can switch one position up from the ( position) or the front fog
control the front fog lights with this position. lights on.
switch when the light control switch
is in the or position. You can turn off the rear fog light
with the front fog lights on by
You can also use the rear fog light turning the switch up again.
when the light control switch is in
the position or the front fog
lights are turned on.

Instruments and Controls 167


06/09/13 17:15:45 32SWA600_173

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) (For some types)

Without AFS, your vehicle still has


normal lighting ability to continue
driving.

On vehicles with multi-information


display
When the AFS indicator comes on,
you will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’
or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display.
During cornering During turning

The adaptive front lighting system AFS Indicator


(AFS) helps to improve visibility
during nighttime driving. The AFS If the AFS indicator comes on and
controls the aiming direction and starts blinking while driving, pull to
lighting distribution of the low the side of the road when it is safe,
beams according to the amount of and turn off the engine. If the AFS
turn applied to the steering wheel indicator keeps blinking, or starts
during cornering or turning. To turn blinking again while driving after
the AFS on, turn the ignition switch turning the ignition switch to the ON
to the ON (II) position, and turn the (II) position, the AFS is not working
headlights on. properly. Have the AFS inspected by
your dealer.

168 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:15:54 32SWA600_174

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) (For some types)

AFS Off Switch Automatic Headlight Adjusting


System
The AFS works with the automatic
headlight adjusting system to sense
changes in vehicle height posture
due to driving and loading conditions
of passengers and luggage. The
vertical aim of the headlights is
automatically adjusted to
compensate for load.

AFS OFF SWITCH If the headlights do not seem to be


On vehicle with CMBS AFS OFF SWITCH properly aimed, have the automatic
headlight adjusting system inspected
This switch is under the power Here are some operating by your dealer.
mirror adjustment switch. Press it to characteristics of the AFS:
turn the AFS on and off. When AFS The system requires an
is off, the AFS indicator comes on as initialization period. It does not
a reminder when you turn on the begin to operate until you have
headlights. driven the vehicle a short distance.

AFS is not activated when the


vehicle is stationary.

AFS is turned off when the shift


lever is in reverse.

Instruments and Controls 169


06/09/13 17:16:02 32SWA600_175

Instrument Panel Brightness

BRIGHTNESS LEVELS

BRIGHTNESS LEVELS
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB On the multi-information display On the information display

You can change the instrument panel The brightness can be shown within On vehicles with information display
brightness only when the light the six brightness levels. When you turn the knob, the middle
switch is on. segment shows the current
Turn the knob on the lower part of On vehicles with multi-information brightness level with circles.
the instrument panel to adjust the display
brightness. When you turn the knob, the lower You will hear a tone when you reach
segment of the display changes to the maximum or minimum
vertical bars that show you the brightness. The brightness level
current level. goes out about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting.

170 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:16:10 32SWA600_176

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Demister

To reduce glare at night, the instru- Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Demister
ment panel illumination dims when
you turn the light switch to or HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
position. Turning the Select/
Reset knob fully to the right until
you hear a beep will cancel the
reduced brightness.

Manual air conditioning system

Push the red button to turn on the The rear window demister will clear
hazard warning lights (four-way fog, frost, and thin ice from the
flashers). This causes all outside window. Turn the ignition switch to
turn signals and both turn indicators the ON (II) position. Push the
in the instrument panel to flash. Use demister button to turn it on and off.
these lights to give a warning to The indicator in the button comes on
other road users that your vehicle is to show the demister is on. It also
causing a hazard. shuts off when you turn off the
ignition switch. You have to turn the
demister on again when you restart
the vehicle.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 171


06/09/13 17:16:15 32SWA600_177

Rear Window Demister

Make sure the rear window is clear


and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.

The demister wires on the inside of


the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.

Pushing the demister also turns the


mirror heaters on and off. For more
information, see page 213 .
Automatic air conditioning system

On some types the demister will shut


itself off within about 10 to 30
minutes according to the outside
temperature.

172 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:16:23 32SWA600_178

Headlight Adjuster

0: A driver or a driver and passenger On vehicles with headlights bulbs of


in the front seat. high voltage discharge tube
1: Five persons in the front and rear Your vehicle is equipped with an
seats. automatic headlight adjusting
2: Five persons in the front and rear system that senses changes in the
seats and luggage in the luggage vehicle posture due to riding and
area, within the limits of maximum loading conditions of the passengers
permissible axle weight and and their luggage and adjusts the
maximum permissible vehicle vertical angle of the headlights (low
weight. beam) automatically.
3: A driver and luggage in the
ADJUSTING DIAL luggage area, within the limits of
maximum permissible axle weight
The vertical angle of the headlights and maximum permissible vehicle
(low beam) can be adjusted weight.
according to the number of persons
and the loading weight in the
luggage area.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON


(II) position. Turn the adjusting dial
to select an appropriate angle of the
headlights.

Instruments and Controls 173


06/09/13 17:16:30 32SWA600_179

Steering Wheel Adjustments

Make any steering wheel 3. Push the lever up to lock the


adjustments before you start driving. steering wheel in position.

4. Make sure you have securely


locked the steering wheel in place
Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up, down, in,
position while driving may and out.
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle and be seriously
injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel LEVER


only when the vehicle is
stopped. 1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.

2. Move the steering wheel up or


down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.

174 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:16:39 32SWA600_180

Keys and Locks

You should have received a key These keys contain electronic


KEY IGNITION KEYS number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
NUMBER WITH REMOTE need this key number if you ever immobilizer system. They will not
TAG TRANSMITTER have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Honda-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.

Remote Transmitter Protect the keys from direct


Your two ignition keys are also fitted sunlight, high temperature, and
with remote transmitters; see page high humidity.
182 for an explanation of the
operation. Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.

Two ignition keys come with your Keep the keys away from liquids.
vehicle. You should keep one of If they get wet, dry them
them in a safe place, away from the immediately with a soft cloth.
vehicle, as a spare.
They fit all the locks on your vehicle.

Instruments and Controls 175


06/09/13 17:16:46 32SWA600_181

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects If the system repeatedly does not (EU models)
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, EC Directives
improperly-coded key (or other contact your dealer. This immobilizer system complies
device) is used, the engine’s fuel with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
system is disabled. Do not attempt to alter this system and Telecommunications Terminal
or add other devices to it. Electrical Equipment and the mutual
When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make recognition of their conformity)
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle undrivable. Directives.
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator If you have lost your key and cannot
starts to blink, it means the system start your engine, contact your
does not recognize the coding of the dealer.
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.

The system may not recognize your


key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.

176 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:16:54 32SWA600_182

Ignition Switch

If the front wheels are turned, the START (III) − Use this position
anti-theft lock may make it difficult only to start the engine. The switch
to turn the key. Firmly turn the returns to the ON (II) position when
steering wheel to the left or right as you let go of the key.
you turn the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
ACCESSORY (I) − You can you leave the key in the ignition
operate the audio system (on some switch in the LOCK (0) or the
types) and the cigarette lighter in ACCESSORY (I) position and open
this position. the driver’s door. On vehicles with
multi-information display, you will
ON (II) − This is the normal key also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ or the
position when driving. Several of the symbol with a ‘‘IGNITION KEY’’
The ignition switch has four indicators on the instrument panel message on the multi-information
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY come on as a test when you turn the display. Remove the key to turn off
(I), ON (II), and START (III). ignition switch from the the beeper and the warning symbol.
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
LOCK (0) − You can insert or position.
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If On some types, the headlights come
your vehicle has an automatic on automatically in this position.
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in park.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 177


06/09/13 17:17:03 32SWA600_183

Ignition Switch, Door Locks

If your vehicle has an automatic Power Door Locks


transmission, the shift lever must be
in Park before you can remove the Lock Lock
key from the ignition switch. Unlock

Removing the key from the


ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
Unlock
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH RED INDICATOR
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when To lock the doors and the tailgate, Each door has a lock tab above the
parked. push the top of the master door lock inner door handle. Pushing forward
switch on the driver’s door, pull the or rearward the lock tab on each
lock tab rearward on the driver’s passenger’s door only locks and
door, or use the key on the outside unlocks that door.
lock on the driver’s door.
When the door is unlocked, you can
Pushing the bottom of the master see the red indicator on the lock tab
door lock switch or pushing forward above the inner door handle.
the lock tab on the driver’s door will
unlock all doors and the tailgate.

178 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:17:10 32SWA600_184

Door Locks

To lock any passenger’s door when The security system activates after
getting out of the vehicle, pull the you lock the doors and the tailgate
lock tab rearward and close the door. with the lock tab on the driver’s door
To lock the driver’s door, remove the or the master door lock switch (see
key from the ignition switch, pull and page 279 ).
hold the outside door handle, and
pull the lock tab rearward or push Lockout Prevention
the top of the master door lock With any door or the tailgate open
switch, then close the door. and the key in the ignition, locking
with master door lock switch is
disabled. The lock tab on the driver’s
door is not disabled if the driver’s
door is closed. Pulling the driver’s
All doors and tailgate lock or unlock lock tab rearward will lock all doors
when you use the key to lock or and the tailgate. If you try to lock an
unlock the driver’s door. open driver’s door by pulling the lock
tab rearward with the outside handle
On vehicles with security system pulled, the lock tabs on all doors pop
When you lock the doors and the out and unlock the doors.
tailgate with the key or the remote
transmitter, all outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel flash three times to verify the
doors and the tailgate are locked and
the security system has set (see
page 279 ). CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 179


06/09/13 17:17:20 32SWA600_185

Door Locks

Super Locking The super locking will not set if any


(For some types) door or the tailgate is not fully closed.
It will be set even if the bonnet, or If there are persons inside the
any window is open. vehicle with the super
locking set, they cannot
With the super locking set, the unlock the doors from the
master door lock switch on the inside.
driver’s door and the lock tabs on all
doors are disabled. Make sure there is no person
inside the vehicle before
You can also set the super locking setting the super locking.
with the remote transmitter. To set it,
push the LOCK button twice within
5 seconds (see page 183 ). On vehicles with ultrasonic sensor
If you set the super locking with the
The super locking helps to protect To cancel the super locking, unlock windows open, the ultrasonic sensor
your vehicle and valuables from theft. the driver’s door with the key or the may activate the alarm unexpectedly
To set the super locking, turn the remote transmitter. when the system senses strong
key towards the front of the vehicle vibrations on the vehicle or loud
twice within 5 seconds. On vehicles with ultrasonic sensor sound.
Only the remote transmitter can
reset the security system. Unlocking
the driver’s door with the key
activates the alarm.

180 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:17:24 32SWA600_186

Door Locks

Childproof Door Locks

LEVER

Unlock

Lock

The childproof door locks are


designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.

Instruments and Controls 181


06/09/13 17:17:31 32SWA600_187

Remote Transmitter

UNLOCK − Press this button to If you do not open any door or the
LED LOCK unlock all doors and the tailgate. tailgate within 30 seconds, the doors
BUTTON When you push the UNLOCK button, and the tailgate automatically relock
all outside turn signals, and both and the security system (if
indicators in the instrument panel equipped) sets.
flash once.
You cannot unlock the doors and the
The front ceiling light (if the light tailgate if the key is in the ignition
switch is in the Door position) and switch.
UNLOCK
BUTTON rear ceiling light (if the light switch
is in the centre position) will come
on when you press the UNLOCK
button. If you do not open any door
LOCK − Press this button to lock or the tailgate within 30 seconds, the
all doors and the tailgate. When you lights fade out. If you relock the
push the LOCK button, all outside doors and tailgate with the remote
turn signals and both indicators in transmitter before 30 seconds have
the instrument panel flash three elapsed, the lights will go off
times to verify the doors and the immediately.
tailgate are locked and the security
system (if equipped) has set. You
cannot lock the doors and the
tailgate if any door or the tailgate is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.

182 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:17:40 32SWA600_188

Remote Transmitter

Super Locking Remote Transmitter Care


(For some types) Avoid dropping or throwing the
You can set the super locking with If there are persons inside the transmitter.
the remote transmitter. To set the vehicle with the super
super locking, push the LOCK locking set, they cannot Protect the transmitter from
button twice within 5 seconds. unlock the doors from the extreme temperature.
inside.
The super locking will not set if any Do not immerse the transmitter in
door or the tailgate is not fully closed. Make sure there is no person any liquid.
It will be set even if the bonnet or inside the vehicle before
any window is open. setting the super locking. If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
To cancel the super locking, push reprogrammed by your dealer.
the UNLOCK button on the remote
transmitter, or unlock the driver’s
door with the key.

See page 180 for information on the


super locking.

Instruments and Controls 183


06/09/13 17:17:48 32SWA600_189

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the Transmitter


Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

SCREW

To replace the battery: 3. Inside the transmitter, separate


the inner cover from the keypad
1. Remove the screw at the base of by carefully prying on the edge
the transmitter with a small with a coin.
Phillips-head screwdriver.

2. Separate the transmitter by prying


its middle seam with your
fingernail.

184 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:17:55 32SWA600_190

Remote Transmitter

(EU models)
EC Directives
An improperly disposed of battery This keyless entry system complies
can hurt the environment. with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
BATTERY Always confirm local regulations for and Telecommunications Terminal
battery disposal. Equipment and the mutual
recognition of their conformity)
Directives.

4. Remove the old battery from the


back of the inner cover, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the + side facing down.

5. Install the parts in reverse order.

Instruments and Controls 185


06/09/13 17:18:01 32SWA600_191

Tailgate

The tailgate will lock or unlock when


you lock or unlock the driver’s door RELEASE HANDLE
with the key, the remote transmitter,
the master door lock switch, or the
lock tab on the driver’s door.

To open the tailgate, push the Keep the tailgate closed at all times
release, then lift up. To close the while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate, use the inner handle to pull tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
it down, then press down on the back from getting into the interior. See
edge. Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
72 .

186 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:18:08 32SWA600_192

Tailgate

Opening the Tailgate Manually

RELEASE LEVER

Unlock

If the power door lock system cannot Push the release lever to the lower
unlock the tailgate, unlock it right as shown.
manually. In this case, you cannot
open the tailgate with the release. If you need to open the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
To open the tailgate, access the problem with the tailgate. Have the
tailgate release lever from inside the vehicle checked by your dealer.
vehicle.
Place a cloth on the upper of the
cover, then use a small flat-tip
screwdriver to remove the cover on
the back of the tailgate.

Instruments and Controls 187


06/09/13 17:18:19 32SWA600_193

Seats

Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments Moves the whole seat up


See pages 17 − 18 for important safety and forward, or down
information and warnings about how to and backward. The front
properly position the seats and seat- of the seat also tilts up or
backs. down at the same time.

On vehicles with power adjustable


driver’s seat Adjusts the seat-back
The controls for the power angle forward or
adjustable driver’s seat are on the backward.
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the seat with the ignition
switch in any position. Make all seat
adjustments before you start driving. Moves the seat forward Increases or decreases
and backward. the lumbar support.
The front passenger’s seat can be
adjusted manually (see the next
page).
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.

Raises or lowers the seat.

188 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:18:27 32SWA600_194

Seats

Manual Seat Adjustments FRONT SEAT


See pages 17 − 18 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.

Make all seat adjustments before


you start driving.

SEAT-BACK ANGLE
Driver’s seat is shown. ADJUSTMENT LEVER

To adjust the front or rear seat To change the seat-back angle of the
forward or backward, pull up on the front seat, pull up the lever on the
bar under the seat cushion’s front outside of the seat bottom.
edge. Move the seat to the desired
position, and release the bar. Try to Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
move the seat to make sure it is rock it back and forth to make sure it
locked in position. is locked in position.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 189


06/09/13 17:18:35 32SWA600_195

Seats

When using the centre seating Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment


position, adjust the left and right side (For some types)
of the rear seats to the same position.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts are


positioned in front of the rear seat-
backs after you adjust the rear seats.

REAR SEAT

The angle of each rear seat-back can


be adjusted separately. To change
the seat-back angle of the rear seat- The height of your driver’s seat is
back, pull up on the release lever on adjustable. To raise the seat,
the top of the seat-back. Move the repeatedly pull up the lever on the
seat-back to the desired position, outside of the seat cushion. To lower
then release the lever. Make sure the seat, push the lever down
the seat-back latches in the new repeatedly.
position.

190 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:18:43 32SWA600_196

Seats

Armrests Rear Armrest/Luggage Pass-


through

FRONT REAR

Each front seat has an armrest on The rear seat armrest is in the
the side of the seat-back. To use it, centre of the rear seat. Pivot it down The rear centre seat-back has an
pivot it down. to use it. armrest. To use it, fold it down. To
use the luggage area pass-through,
A beverage holder is located in the pull up the release on top of the
armrest. centre seat-back and fold it down.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 191


06/09/13 17:18:50 32SWA600_197

Seats

If your vehicle is equipped with a Head Restraints Front Position


dual deck luggage shelf, do not use See page 18 for important safety
the shelf when any seat-back is information and a warning about how to
folded down. Objects placed on this properly position the head restraints.
shelf can be thrown forward and
occupants can be injured during Your vehicle is equipped with head
sudden stops or a collision. restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
For more information of the dual passengers from whiplash and other
deck luggage shelf, see page 205 . injuries.

They are most effective when you RELEASE BUTTON


adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the The head restraints adjust for height.
centre of the restraint. You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.

192 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:18:56 32SWA600_198

Seats

To remove a head restraint, pull it up


as far as it will go. Push the release
button, then pull the restraint out of
the seat-back.

Make sure the removed head


restraints are securely stored.

Make sure the head restraint locks


in position when you reinstall it.
RELEASE RELEASE
Rear Outer Position BUTTON Rear Centre Position BUTTON

When carrying a passenger in the Always replace the rear head


rear centre seating position, make restraints when the seat-
sure the rear centre head restraint is backs are returned to upright
adjusted to its highest position. position.

Instruments and Controls 193


06/09/13 17:19:05 32SWA600_199

Seats

Reclining the Front Seats 3. Adjust the front seats forward as


far as possible. Pull up the seat-
back angle adjustment lever and
pivot the seat-back backward until
it is level with the rear seat
cushion.

The seat-back of the power


adjustable driver’s seat cannot be
SLIDE BAR level. Do not push the seat-back
SEAT-BACK ANGLE down forcibly.
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
4. Adjust the rear seat-back to the
desired position.

Reverse this procedure to return the


You can recline the seat-backs on the 1. Adjust the rear seats as far back front and rear seats to the upright
front seats so they are level with the as possible. position. Make sure you install the
rear seat cushions, making a large head restraints and securely lock the
cushioned area. To do this: 2. Remove the front head restraints seats before driving.
(see page193), and store them
If your vehicle has the power securely. When you return the seat-back to its
adjustable driver’s seat, only the upright position, hold the seat-back
passenger’s side can be level as to keep it from going up too quickly.
follows.

194 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:19:13 32SWA600_200

Seats

Folding the Rear Seats Down


Each rear seat-back can be folded
Make sure the seat-backs are down separately to give more
latched securely before luggage room. With either of the
driving. outer seat-backs folded-down, you
can still carry a passenger in the rear
seat. With the centre seat-back
folded-down, either outer seating
position can be used.
Always replace the rear head
restraints when the seat- You can also fold up the left or right BUCKLE
backs are returned to upright side of the rear seats separately to
position. create further luggage space (see
page 197 ). 1. Push the seat belt buckles into the
seat cushion.
Remove any items from the seat
before folding down the seat-back.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 195


06/09/13 17:19:22 32SWA600_201

Seats

Reverse this procedure to return the


seat-back to the upright position.
Make sure the seat is secured and
the seat belt in front of the seat-back
before driving.

In the rear centre seating position,


be sure the detachable anchor is
latched securely (see page 199 ).

LATCH PLATE RELEASE LEVER


Make sure the seat-backs are
When you are folding the rear centre 2. Lower the rear head restraint to latched securely before
seat-back, use the latch plate to its lowest position. driving.
release the centre seat belt from the
detachable anchor (see page 199 ). 3. Pull up the release lever on the top
Allow the seat belt to retract into the of the seat-back.
holder on the ceiling and store the
buckles in it. 4. Fold the seat-back forward.

Make sure the rear seat armrest is Do not put any heavy items on the
stored. seat-back when it is folded down.

196 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:19:32 32SWA600_202

Seats

When any seat-back is folded down, Folding the Rear Seat Forward To fold the rear seat forward:
do not use the dual deck luggage
shelf (if equipped). 1. Pull up the bar under the seat
cushion and slide the rear seat
Make sure all items in the luggage backward. The rear seat will not
area are secured. Loose items can fly fold forward unless it is not as far
forward and cause injury if you have back as it will go.
to brake hard (See Carrying
Luggage on page 343 ). 2. Follow steps 1 through 4 on page
195 for folding down the seat-
back.

SLIDE BAR Lower the centre seat-back before


folding the right side seat forward.
The left and right rear seats can be
folded up separately to make room
for luggage.

Remove any items from the seat


before you fold up the seat cushion.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 197


06/09/13 17:19:40 32SWA600_203

Seats

FASTENING ANCHOR FASTENING STRAP ANCHOR


STRAP

HOOK

LOCK RELEASE STRAP HOOK

3. Unlock the seat from the floor by 4. Pull out the fastening strap from 5. Pull down on the anchor to engage
pulling the lock release strap the slit on the seat-back. Then the upper part of the anchor
under the seat cushion’s back attach the anchor on the fastening securely on the hook, and make
edge, then lift the rear of the seat. strap to the hook on the centre sure the seat is secure.
You cannot fold up the rear seat if pillar.
it is not latched securely in the Reverse this procedure to return the
rearmost position. seat to the upright position.
Make sure the seat is securely
latched before driving.
When you are not using the
fastening strap, store the strap into
the slit on the seat-back.

198 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:19:49 32SWA600_204

Seats

Detachable Anchor

Make sure the seat-backs are DETACHABLE ANCHOR Using a seat belt with the
latched securely before detachable anchor unlatched
driving. increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a
crash.
Make sure both outer seat belts are
positioned in side of the rear seat- Before using the seat belt,
backs. make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
In the centre seating position of the
rear seat, be sure the detachable
anchor is latched securely before
using the seat belt (see page 200 ). The seat belt in the rear centre seat
is equipped with a detachable anchor.
Make sure all items in the luggage
area are secured. Loose items can fly This allows the centre seat belt to be
forward and cause injury if you have unlatched when the rear centre seat
to brake hard (See Carrying back is folded down or the right side
Luggage on page 343 ). rear seat is folded forward.

Do not use the dual deck luggage


shelf (if equipped) when the seats
are folded down or forward.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 199


06/09/13 17:19:57 32SWA600_205

Seats

SMALL LATCH PLATE ANCHOR BUCKLE

TRIANGLE
MARKS

LATCH PLATE ANCHOR BUCKLE LATCH PLATE

Pull out the small latch plate and the Line up the triangle marks on the To unlatch the detachable anchor,
latch plate from each holding slot in small latch plate and anchor buckle insert the latch plate into the slot on
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt when reattaching the belt and buckle. the side of the anchor buckle. Store
to extend it. the detachable anchor and seat belt
Tug on the seat belt to verify that latch plates in the retractor housing.
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.

200 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:20:04 32SWA600_206

Seat Heaters (For some types)

Push the front of the switch, HI, to Follow these precautions whenever
rapidly heat up the seat. After the you use the seat heaters:
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing Use the HI setting only to heat the
the back of the switch. This will keep seats quickly, because it draws
the seat warm. large amounts of current from the
battery.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns If the engine is left idling for an
back on after the seat’s temperature extended period, do not use the
drops. seat heaters, even on the LO
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES setting. It can weaken the battery,
In the LO setting, the heater runs causing hard starting.
Both front seats are equipped with continuously. It does not cycle with
seat heaters. The ignition switch temperature changes.
must be in the ON (II) position to
use the heaters.

Instruments and Controls 201


06/09/13 17:20:14 32SWA600_207

Tonneau Cover (For some types)

Using Each Front Cover Using Rear Cover

You can use the tonneau cover to


conceal your parcels and protect To extend each front cover, pull the To extend the rear cover, pull the
them from direct sunlight. clips of the cover, and attach them to cover’s leading edge, then clip the
the legs of each rear head restraint. mounting rods in the hooks at both
The tonneau cover can be extended sides of the tailgate opening.
forward and rearward separately. To retract each front cover, detach
the clips and guide the cover, so it To retract the rear cover, slip the
The left, centre and right part of the rolls back fully into its housing. rods out of the hooks and guide the
front cover can be used separately. cover so it rolls back fully into its
housing.
Do not store parcels on the tonneau
cover. The tonneau cover may break
if weight is placed on it.

202 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:20:23 32SWA600_208

Tonneau Cover (For some types)

Storing the Tonneau Cover Housing


Unit

You can store the tonneau cover 3. Lower the right end of the unit, 4. While pushing the right end of the
housing on the luggage area floor to and insert it into the holder on the housing unit to the right holder,
make a large room. right side panel. lower the left end through the
opening on the left side panel.
1. Retract all covers fully into the
tonneau cover housing.

2. Release each side of the tonneau


cover housing unit by pushing the
left end of the unit toward the
right end and lifting it upward. CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 203


06/09/13 17:20:30 32SWA600_209

Tonneau Cover (For some types)

Make sure the housing unit is


securely placed so it will not come
loose while you are driving.

Reverse this procedure to install the


tonneau cover housing unit in place.

5. While pushing the left end, install To remove the tonneau cover
the right side of the housing unit housing unit from the vehicle, follow
in the holder on the lower right the step 3, then take it out while
side panel. pushing the right end of the housing.
Do not pull it out forcibly.

Do not put heavy weight on the


tonneau cover housing unit. This
may damage it.

204 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:20:37 32SWA600_210

Dual Deck Luggage Shelf (For some types)

The dual deck luggage shelf will Make sure to use the dual deck To store the dual deck luggage shelf,
separate the storage area into two luggage shelf fully opened and lift up either side of it, then move it
storage areas. On the upper area, securely latched. as shown above.
you can store small and light items.
You should place heavy items in the To remove the dual deck luggage Place the dual deck luggage shelf on
lower storage area. You can remove shelf, fold up the rear half of the the far side of the luggage floor, then
the dual deck luggage shelf and shelf forward onto the front half, slide it forward while folding out the
store it on the luggage floor to make push up on both sides, then pull it upper half of the shelf.
a larger luggage area. toward you.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 205


06/09/13 17:20:44 32SWA600_211

Dual Deck Luggage Shelf (For some types)

The maximum load on the dual deck


luggage shelf is 10kg. This is shown
Do not use this shelf if the on a label on the left side of the dual
second row seats are folded deck luggage shelf (see next page).
down. To prevent damage to the dual deck
luggage shelf, do not exceed the
Objects placed on the shelf maximum load.
could be thrown forward
during a crash or sudden stop Make sure all items in the luggage
and hurt someone. area are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying
When any of the rear seats are Luggage on page 343 ).
The dual deck luggage shelf can be folded down or forward, do not place
placed on the floor as shown above. any objects on the dual deck luggage
shelf. Make sure to store the shelf
Reverse this procedure to return the on the luggage area floor. It could be
dual deck luggage shelf to the upper unlatched during a crash.
position. Make sure the dual deck
luggage shelf is latched securely.

206 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:20:48 32SWA600_212

Dual Deck Luggage Shelf (For some types)

To remind you of how to use the


dual deck luggage shelf properly, a
To prevent damage, do not place label shown below is attached to the
more than 10 kg on this shelf. shelf.

Instruments and Controls 207


06/09/13 17:20:56 32SWA600_213

Power Windows

DRIVER’S WINDOW AUTO − To open the driver’s or the


SWITCH front passenger’s window fully, push
Closing a power window on the window switch firmly down, then
someone’s hands or fingers release it. The window automatically
can cause serious injury. goes down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
Make sure your passengers pull back on the window switch
are away from the windows briefly.
before closing them.
To close the driver’s or the front
MAIN SWITCH passenger’s window fully, pull back
FRONT PASSENGER’S
WINDOW SWITCH WARNING: Always take the ignition the window switch firmly, then
key with you whenever you leave the release it. The window automatically
Turn the ignition switch to the ON vehicle alone (with other occupants). goes all the way up. To stop the
(II) position to raise or lower any window from going all the way up,
window. To open a window, push the The driver’s door armrest has a push down on the window switch
switch down lightly and hold it. master power window control panel. briefly.
Release the switch when you want To open any of the passengers’
the window to stop. Pull back on the windows, push down lightly on the
switch and hold it to close the appropriate switch, and hold it until
window. the window reaches the desired
position. To close the window, pull
The windows will operate for up to back lightly on the window switch.
10 minutes after you turn off the Release the switch when the window
ignition switch. Opening either front gets to the position you want.
door cancels this function.

208 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:21:02 32SWA600_214

Power Windows

To open or close the driver’s or the AUTO REVERSE − If either of the


front passenger’s window partially, front windows runs into any obstacle
push down or pull back on the while it is closing automatically, it
window switch lightly and hold it. will stop, and then reverse direction.
The window will stop when you To close the window, remove the
release the switch. obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passengers’ Auto reverse stops sensing when the
windows cannot be raised or lowered. window is almost closed. You should
To cancel this feature, push on the always check that all passengers and
switch again to get it to pop out. objects are away from the window
Keep the MAIN switch pushed in before closing it.
when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.

The indicators inside the switches


come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.

Instruments and Controls 209


06/09/13 17:21:08 32SWA600_215

Sunshades (For some types)

Opening or closing the


sunshade on someone’s
hands or fingers may cause
injury.

Make sure all hands and


fingers are clear of the
sunshade before opening or
closing it.

Both of the front and rear sunshades To open the sunshades, push the WARNING: Always take the ignition
can be opened. The front sunshade switch backward and hold it. To key with you whenever you leave the
is rolled up in the centre holder from close them, push the switch forward vehicle alone (with other occupants).
front to rear, and the rear sunshade and hold it. Release the switch when
from rear to front at the same time. the sunshades reach the desired
Use the switch on the front ceiling to position, or to stop the operation.
operate the sunshades. You must
turn the ignition switch to the ON The front and rear sunshades can
(II) position to operate the only be opened or closed together
sunshades.

210 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:21:14 32SWA600_216

Sunshades (For some types)

AUTO − To open the sunshades AUTO REVERSE − If either of the The sunshades have a key-off delay.
fully, push the switch backward front and rear sunshades runs into You can still open and close the
firmly, then release it. The any obstacle while they are closing sunshades for up to 10 minutes after
sunshades automatically open all the automatically, each sunshade will you turn off the ignition switch. The
way. To stop the sunshades from reverse direction and then stop. To key-off delay cancels as soon as a
opening, push the switch briefly. close the sunshades, remove the you open either front door.
obstacle, then use the sunshade
To close the sunshade fully, push the switch again.
switch forward firmly, then release it.
The sunshades automatically close Auto reverse stops sensing when
all the way. To stop the sunshades each sunshade is almost closed. You
from closing, push the switch briefly. should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
To open or close the sunshades from the sunshades before closing
partially, push the sunshade switch them.
backward or forward lightly and hold
it. The sunshade will stop when you
release the switch.

Instruments and Controls 211


06/09/13 17:21:22 32SWA600_217

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push the appropriate edge of the


TAB adjustment switch to move the
SELECTOR SWITCH mirror right, left, up, or down.

4. When you finish, move the


selector switch to the centre (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch to keep your
settings.

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before (II) position.
you start driving.
2. Move the selector switch to L (left
The inside mirror has day and night side) or R (right side).
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.

212 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:21:31 32SWA600_218

Mirrors

Power Mirror Heaters Folding Door Mirrors


(For some types)
REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/ REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/
HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON

Manual air conditioning type Automatic air conditioning type


FOLDING SWITCH
The outside mirrors are heated to On some types, this heated mirror
remove fog and frost. With the function has a timer (see page 172 ). Door mirrors can be folded by the
ignition switch in the ON (II) folding switch next to the main
position, turn on the heaters by switch, which enables you to park
pressing the rear window demister your vehicle in a limited parking
button. The indicator in the button space easily. Make sure you fold out
comes on as a reminder. Press the the mirrors before you start driving.
button again to turn the heaters and With the ignition switch in the ON
the demister off. (II) position, press the folding switch
to fold up both outside mirrors
simultaneously. To fold out, press
the switch again. CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 213


06/09/13 17:21:38 32SWA600_219

Mirrors, Parking Brake

Never drive your vehicle with the Parking Brake


outside mirrors folded.
PARKING BRAKE LEVER Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will
sound if the vehicle is driven with
the parking brake on.

On vehicles with multi-information


display
You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’
or this symbol with a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display.
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 86 ).

214 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:21:44 32SWA600_220

Interior Convenience Items

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET COAT HOOK DOOR BEVERAGE HOLDERS SUNGLASSES HOLDER*
CONVERSATION MIRROR*
TONNEAU COVER* SUN VISOR
VANITY MIRROR

UPPER GLOVE BOX

CIGARETTE
LIGHTER

DUAL DECK LUGGAGE SHELF* LOWER GLOVE BOX


CENTRE CONSOLE with ACCESSORY
BEVERAGE HOLDERS in BEVERAGE HOLDERS POWER SOCKET ASHTRAY CENTRE POCKETS
REAR SEAT ARMREST

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK*


* : If equipped

Instruments and Controls 215


06/09/13 17:21:52 32SWA600_221

Interior Convenience Items

Lower Glove Box Upper Glove Box

An open glove box can cause EDGE


serious injury to your
passenger in a crash, even if
the passenger is wearing the
seat belt.

Always keep the glove box


closed while driving.
To lock
LOWER GLOVE BOX LEVER

Open the lower glove box by pulling Open the upper glove box by
the bottom of the handle. Close it pushing up the lever. Close it by
with a firm push. pulling down on the edge under the
lever.
You can lock or unlock the glove box
with the ignition key.

On some types, the glove box light


comes on only when the position
lights are on.

216 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:21:59 32SWA600_222

Interior Convenience Items

Beverage Holders Be careful when you are using the


beverage holders. A spilled liquid
FRONT that is very hot can scald you or your REAR
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage the


upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
BEVERAGE HOLDER

The front beverage holder is in the On vehicles with rear seat armrest
centre console compartment. The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the centre armrest. To use
it, pivot the armrest down.

Instruments and Controls 217


06/09/13 17:22:07 32SWA600_223

Interior Convenience Items

Accessory Power Sockets Make sure to put the socket cover


back in place to prevent any small
FRONT REAR foreign objects getting into the
socket.

Your vehicle has two accessory To use an accessory power socket,


power sockets. the ignition switch must be in the
Each socket is intended to supply ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
power for 12 volt DC accessories They will not power an automotive
that are rated 120 watts or less (10 type cigarette lighter element.
amps).
It is recommended that these
accessory sockets are used for
genuine Honda accessories.

218 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:22:17 32SWA600_224

Interior Convenience Items

Console Compartment Sunglasses Holder

Push

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open or close the console To open the sunglasses holder, push Some larger styles of sunglasses
compartment, slide the lid rearward on the raised detent. It will unlatch may not fit in the holder.
or forward. and swing down. To close it, push it
until it latches. Make sure the holder You may also store small items in
On some types is closed while you are driving. this holder. Make sure they are
There is a sunglasses holder in the small enough to let the holder close
console compartment. Slide it and latch, and that they are not
forward or rearward to access the heavy enough to cause the holder to
lower part of the compartment. pop open while driving.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 219


06/09/13 17:22:24 32SWA600_225

Interior Convenience Items

Conversation Mirror
(For some types)
SUNGLASSES HOLDER

On some types
The sunglasses holder is located in The sunglasses holder uses a convex
the centre console compartment. mirror for its bottom panel. You can
see all the vehicle passengers in this
mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder fully, push it to the
first detent, and release it.

To switch back to the sunglasses


holder, close the conversation mirror
and then open the sunglasses holder.

220 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:22:35 32SWA600_226

Interior Convenience Items

Coat Hook Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

COAT HOOK

SUN VISOR

To use a coat hook, slide it out To use the sun visor, pull it down. Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
slightly, then pull it down. You can also use the sun visor at the it.
side window. Remove the support
Make sure the coat hook is pulled up rod from the clip and swing the sun On some types
when you are not using it. This hook visor toward the side window. The light comes on when you pull up
is not designed for large or heavy the cover.
items. Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting Make sure you close the cover when
into or out of the vehicle. you are not using the vanity mirror.
The vanity mirror light will not come
on if the sun visor is moved to the
side window.

Instruments and Controls 221


06/09/13 17:22:42 32SWA600_227

Interior Convenience Items

Cigarette Lighter Ashtray


(For some types)
Use the ashtray only for cigarettes,
cigars, and other smoking materials.
To prevent a possible fire and
damage to your vehicle, don’t put
paper or other things that can burn
in the ashtray.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER
ASHTRAY
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) A removable ashtray is equipped
position for the cigarette lighter to with your vehicle. The ashtray fits in
work. To heat up the lighter, push it the beverage holders. To open it, pull
in. It will pop out when it is ready for up on the lid.
use. Do not hold the lighter in while
it is heating up, you could cause it to
overheat.

222 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:22:51 32SWA600_228

Interior Lights

Ceiling Light Unlock the doors and the tailgate Spotlights


with the key or remote transmitter.

After all doors are closed tightly, the


light dims slightly, then fades out in
about 30 seconds. The light turns off
ON before 30 seconds have elapsed if
you insert the key to the ignition
switch.
Push
OFF If you leave any door open without Push
DOOR ACTIVATED the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after 3 On vehicle without sunshades
minutes.
The ceiling light has a three-position Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
switch; ON, Door Activated, and lens. Push the lens again to turn it
OFF. In the Door Activated (centre) off. You can use the spotlights at all
position, the light comes on when times.
you:

Open any door.

Remove the key from the ignition


switch. If you do not open a door,
the light fades out in about 30
seconds. CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 223


06/09/13 17:22:58 32SWA600_229

Interior Lights

The spotlights (with the switch in Luggage Area Light


the DOOR position) also come on
when you unlock the door with the
key or the remote transmitter, and
when you remove the key from the
ignition switch. ON

Push OFF
Push

On vehicles with sunshades TAILGATE ACTIVATED

On vehicles with sunshades The luggage area light has a three-


The spotlights have a two-position position switch. In the OFF position,
switch. In the DOOR position, the the light does not come on. In the
lights come on when you open any centre position, it comes on when
door. In the OFF position, the lights you open the tailgate. In the ON
do not come on. position, it stays on continuously.

224 Instruments and Controls


06/09/13 17:23:04 32SWA600_230

Interior Lights

Ignition Switch Light Courtesy Light


The ignition switch light comes on
when you open the driver’s door, and
fades out in about 30 seconds after
you close the door.

The courtesy light between the


spotlights comes on when you turn
the position lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the instrument
panel brightness control knob on the
dashboard, with the ignition switch
in the ON (II) position (see page
170 ).

Instruments and Controls 225


06/09/13 17:23:06 32SWA600_231

226
06/09/13 17:23:13 32SWA600_232

Features

The heating and air conditioning Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 228
system in your vehicle provides a Using the A/C ............................ 233
comfortable driving environment in Climate Control System ................ 235
all weather conditions. Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors.................................... 243
The standard audio system on some Audio System ................................. 245
models has many features. This Playing the Radio ........................... 246
section describes those features and Playing a Disc ................................. 258
how to use them. Protecting Your Discs ................... 268
Disc Player/Changer Error
On some types Messages .................................... 269
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Optional Disc Changer Error
system that requires a code number Messages .................................... 270
to enable it. Playing a Tape ................................ 271
Remote Audio Controls................. 274
On some types Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 275
The security system helps to Radio Theft Protection.................. 276
discourage vandalism and theft of Setting the Clock ........................... 277
your vehicle. Security System ............................. 279
Cruise Control ................................ 282
Adaptive Cruise Control ............... 285
Parking Sensor System ................. 303
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 308
Hands-Free Telephone System.... 309

Features 227
06/09/13 17:23:21 32SWA600_233

Vents, Heating, and A/C

On vehicles with manual air conditioning Vent Controls


system
Proper use of the heating and CENTRE VENTS DRIVER’S SIDE VENT TAB
cooling system can make the interior TAB TAB
dry and comfortable, and keep the
windows clear for the best visibility. DIAL
The engine must be running for the
heater and air conditioning to
generate hot and cold air. Close Open

The direction of airflow from the The vents in the corners of the
vents in the centre and each corner dashboard can be opened and closed
of the dashboard is adjustable. with the dials underneath them.

To adjust the airflow from each vent,


move the tab up-and-down and side-
to-side.

228 Features
06/09/13 17:23:26 32SWA600_234

Vents, Heating, and A/C

PASSENGER’S SIDE VENT

Open Close

REAR HEATER DUCTS

Features 229
06/09/13 17:23:30 32SWA600_235

Vents, Heating, and A/C

FAN CONTROL DIAL* MODE CONTROL BUTTONS TEMPERATURE


CONTROL DIAL*

AIR CONDITIONING FRESH AIR BUTTON


(A/C) BUTTON
RECIRCULATION REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/HEATED
BUTTON MIRRORS BUTTON

* : On the right-hand drive type, these controls are in opposite location.


230 Features
06/09/13 17:23:43 32SWA600_236

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Fan Control Dial Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Fresh Air and Recirculation
Turn the dial clockwise to increase This button turns the air Buttons
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the conditioning on and off. The These two buttons control the
dial anticlockwise to decrease it. indicator in the button is on when source of air going into the system.
the A/C is on. In fresh air mode , air comes
Temperature Control Dial from outside the vehicle. In
Turning this dial clockwise increases Rear Window Demister Button recirculation mode , the
the temperature of the airflow. This button turns the rear window interior air recycles through the
demister off and on (see page 171 ). system.

This button also operates the heated The outside air intakes for the
outside mirrors (see page 213 ). heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windscreen. Keep
this area clear of leaves and other
debris.

The system should be left in fresh


air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode when


driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.

Features 231
06/09/13 17:23:57 32SWA600_237

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Mode Control Airflow is divided between Ventilation


Use the mode control buttons to the floor vents and demister vents at The flow-through ventilation system
select the vents air flows from. Some the base of the windscreen. draws in outside air, circulates it
air will flow from the dashboard through the interior, then discharges
corner vents in all modes. Air flows from the defroster it through vents near the tailgate.
vents at the base of the windscreen.
Air flows from the centre 1. Set the temperature to the lower
and corner vents in the dashboard. On some types limit.
When you select or , 2. Make sure the A/C is off.
Airflow is divided between the system automatically switches to 3. Select and fresh air mode.
the vents in the dashboard and the fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. 4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
floor vents.

Air flows from the floor


vents.

On some types
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode.

232 Features
06/09/13 17:24:08 32SWA600_238

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Using the Heater Using the A/C Dehumidify the Interior


The heater uses engine coolant to Air conditioning places an extra load Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it on the engine. Watch the engine moisture from the air. When used in
will be several minutes before you coolant temperature gauge (see page combination with the heater, it
feel warm air coming from the 99 ). If it moves near the red zone, makes the interior warm and dry and
system. turn off the A/C until the gauge can prevent the windows from
reading returns to normal. fogging up.
1. Select and fresh air mode.
On some types, when you select 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the 1. Turn the fan on.
, the system automatically button. The indicator in the button 2. Turn on the air conditioning.
switches to fresh air mode. comes on when a fan speed is 3. Select and fresh air mode.
2. Set the fan to the desired speed. selected. 4. Adjust the temperature to your
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with 2. Make sure the temperature is set preference.
the temperature control dial. to maximum cool.
3. Select . This setting is suitable for all driving
On Diesel models only 4. If the outside air is humid, select conditions whenever the outside
Your vehicle has the hot gas heater recirculation mode. If the outside temperature is above 0°C.
system. It assists the heater to warm air is dry, select fresh air mode.
the air (see page 244 ). 5. Set the fan to the desired speed.

If the interior is very warm, you can


cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.

Features 233
06/09/13 17:24:19 32SWA600_239

Vents, Heating, and A/C

To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice To Turn Everything Off
To remove fog from the inside of the From the Windows Turning the fan speed control dial all
windows: 1. Select and fresh air mode. the way to the left shuts the system
On some types, the system off.
1. Set the fan to the desired speed or automatically switches to fresh air
high for faster defrosting. mode and turns on the A/C. Keep the system off for short
2. Turn on the air conditioning. 2. Select . periods only.
3. Select and fresh air mode. 3. Set the fan and temperature
On some types, when you select controls to maximum level. To keep stale air and mustiness
, the system automatically from collecting, you should have
switches to fresh air mode and To clear the windows faster, you can the fan running at all times.
turns on the A/C. close the dashboard corner vents by
4. Adjust the temperature so the rotating the wheel next to each vent.
airflow feels warm. This sends more warm air to the
5. Select to help clear the windscreen defroster vents. Once
rear window. the windscreen is clear, select the
6. To increase airflow to the fresh air mode to avoid fogging the
windscreen, close the side vents. windows.

On some types For your safety, make sure you have


When you switch to another mode a clear view through all the windows
from , the A/C stays on. before driving.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.

234 Features
06/09/13 17:24:28 32SWA600_240

Climate Control System

On vehicles with air conditioning system CENTRE VENTS DRIVER’S SIDE VENT TAB
The automatic climate control TAB
system in your vehicle picks the
proper combination of air
conditioning, heating, and ventilation
to maintain the interior temperature
DIAL
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and airflow levels.
Close Open
You can adjust the temperatures of
the driver’s side and the passenger’s
side independently (see page 242 ).

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s To activate the climate control To adjust the airflow from each vent,
interior temperature is system, the engine must be running. move the tab in the centre of each
independently regulated for the vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
driver and passenger. The direction of airflow from the
vents in the centre and each corner The vents in the corners of the
of the dashboard is adjustable. dashboard can be opened and closed
with the dials underneath them.

CONTINUED

Features 235
06/09/13 17:24:34 32SWA600_241

Climate Control System

PASSENGER’S SIDE VENT

Close
Open

Voice Control System


On vehicles with navigation system
In addition to the standard air
conditioning controls, the climate
control system in your vehicle can be
operated using the voice control
system. See the navigation system
manual for complete details.

236 Features
06/09/13 17:24:40 32SWA600_242

Climate Control System

DRIVER’S SIDE AUTO OFF FAN AIR CONDITIONING


TEMPERATURE BUTTON BUTTON CONTROL BUTTON
CONTROL DIAL* BAR
MODE BUTTON

DUAL
BUTTON

RECIRCULATION WINDSCREEN REAR WINDOW PASSENGER’S SIDE


BUTTON DEMISTER DEMISTER/ TEMPERATURE
BUTTON MIRRORS HEATER CONTROL DIAL*
BUTTON

* : On the right-hand drive type, these controls are in opposite location.


Features 237
06/09/13 17:24:51 32SWA600_243

Climate Control System

Automatic Climate Control In cold weather, the fan will not To Turn Everything Off
To put the automatic climate control come on automatically until the If you press the OFF button, the
in fully-automatic mode: heater starts to develop warm air. climate control system shuts off
completely.
1. Press the AUTO button. When the indicator in the dual Keep the system completely off
button is on, the driver’s side and for short periods only.
2. Set the desired temperature by passenger’s side temperature can be
turning the driver’s side controlled independently (see page To keep stale air and mustiness
temperature control dial. You will 242 ). from collecting, you should have
see AUTO and the selected the fan running at all times.
temperature in the display. You On Diesel models only
can also set the passenger’s side Your vehicle has the hot gas heater
temperature by turning the system. It assists the heater to warm
passenger’s side dial. the air (see page 244 ).

The system automatically selects the


proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to its


lower limit ( ) or its upper limit
( ), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.

238 Features
06/09/13 17:25:01 32SWA600_244

Climate Control System

Semi-automatic Operation Temperature Control Recirculation Button


You can manually select various Turning the temperature control dial When the recirculation indicator is
functions of the climate control clockwise increases the temperature on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
system when it is in fully automatic of the airflow. sent throughout the system again.
mode. All other features remain When the indicator is off, air is
automatically controlled. Making any The driver and passenger can select brought in from the outside of the
manual selection causes the word independent temperature settings. vehicle (fresh air mode).
AUTO in the display to go out. Press the DUAL button. When the
indicator in the button is lit, turn the The outside air intakes for the
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button appropriate dial to adjust the climate control system are at the
Press the A/C button to turn the air temperature on the driver’s or base of the windscreen. Keep this
conditioning on and off. You will see passenger’s side. When the indicator area clear of leaves and other debris.
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. is off, both sides adjust to the same
temperature. The system should be left in fresh
When you turn the A/C off, the air mode under almost all conditions.
system cannot regulate the inside Keeping the system in recirculation
temperature if you set the mode, particularly with the A/C off,
temperature control dial below the can cause the windows to fog up.
outside temperature.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.

CONTINUED

Features 239
06/09/13 17:25:12 32SWA600_245

Climate Control System

Fan Control Dual Button Mode Button


Select the fan speed by pressing Press the DUAL button to select Use the MODE button to select the
either side of the fan speed control dual temperature control mode (see vents the air flows from. Some air
bar ( ▲ or ▼ ). The fan speed is page 242 ). will flow from the dashboard corner
shown in vertical bars on the display. vents in all modes.
You can set the temperatures for the
driver’s side and the passenger’s side Each time you press the MODE
separately when this button is button, the display shows the mode
pressed (indicator is on). When the selected.
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
you can adjust both sides to the Airflow is divided between
same temperature with the driver’s the floor and corner vents, and the
side temperature control dial. demister vents at the base of the
windscreen.

Air flows from the floor and


corner vents.

Airflow is divided between


the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.

Air flows from the centre


and corner vents in the dashboard.

240 Features
06/09/13 17:25:20 32SWA600_246

Climate Control System

Windscreen Demister Button Rear Window Demister Button


This button directs the main airflow This button turns the rear window
to the windscreen for faster demister off and on (see page 171 ).
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made. When you turn on the rear window
demister, the heated door mirror is
When you select , the system also turned on automatically.
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase airflow to the windscreen
by closing the corner vents on the
dashboard.

When you turn off by


pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.

For your safety, make sure you have


a clear view through all the windows
before driving.

Features 241
06/09/13 17:25:26 32SWA600_247

Climate Control System

Dual Temperature Control


The temperatures of the driver’s side
and the passenger’s side can be Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side
controlled independently when the
indicator in the DUAL button is on.

To adjust the driver’s side, turn the


driver’s side temperature control dial
on the climate control panel. To
adjust the passenger’s side, turn the
passenger’s side temperature control
dial.

Push AUTO or . The selected


temperatures appear in the display.
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
adjusting the driver’s temperature
control dial.

242 Features
06/09/13 17:25:34 32SWA600_248

Climate Control System

To set the driver’s side temperature Sunlight and Temperature


to a different value than the Sensors
passenger’s side, press the DUAL
button, then turn the temperature SUNLIGHT SENSOR
control dial on the control panel. To
set the passenger’s side to a
different value than the driver’s side,
turn the passenger’s side
temperature control dial. You can
adjust the passenger’s side without
pressing the DUAL button first.

When you set the temperature to its


lower limit or its upper limit, it will be TEMPERATURE SENSOR
displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.
The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.

Features 243
06/09/13 17:25:41 32SWA600_249

Climate Control System

Hot Gas Heater System After the engine warms up or the


On Diesel models only outside temperature is high, the hot
Your vehicle has the hot gas heater gas heater system will stop
system. It assists the heater until the automatically.
engine warms up after you start the
engine. This system uses your You may hear some noise from the
vehicle’s air conditioning system to engine compartment. This is normal;
warm the air. Under the following it is the hot gas heater activation.
conditions, the hot gas heater
system operates automatically. The hot gas heater system will not
activate if the outside temperature is
The engine coolant is cold (about too cold (under −30°C).
under 75°C).

The outside temperature is low


(about under 5°C).

The driver’s side temperature


control dial is set to any position
except for the maximum cool.

The fan is set to the desired speed.

244 Features
06/09/13 17:25:50 32SWA600_250

Audio System

The audio system is standard


equipment on some models. This Audio System with In-dash Disc Player
section explains how to operate the
standard audio system installed on
the vehicle without navigation
system. Refer to the navigation
system owner’s manual for
information of how to operate the
audio system on the vehicle with
navigation system.

The anti-theft feature may disable


the system if it is disconnected from
the vehicle’s battery. To get the Audio System with In-dash Disc Changer
system working again, you must
enter a code number (see page 276 ).

Voice Control System


On vehicles with navigation system
In addition to the standard audio
controls, the audio system in your
vehicle can be operated using the
voice control system. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.

Features 245
06/09/13 17:25:58 32SWA600_251

Playing the Radio

Audio System with In-dash Disc Player Audio System with In-dash Disc Changer

AM AM FM AUTO SELECT BUTTON


BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
SCAN FM AUTO SELECT
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON

SEEK BAR SEEK BAR

POWER/VOLUME PRESET TUNE KNOB POWER/VOLUME PRESET TUNE KNOB


KNOB BUTTONS KNOB BUTTONS

246 Features
06/09/13 17:26:07 32SWA600_252

Playing the Radio

To Play the Radio To Select a Station SCAN − The scan function samples
The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to all stations with strong signals on the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected selected band. To activate it, press
Turn the system on by pushing the band: tune, seek, scan, the preset the SCAN button, then release it.
power/volume knob or the AM or buttons, and auto select. You will see SCAN in the display.
FM button. Adjust the volume by The system will scan for a station
turning the power/volume knob. TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to with a strong signal. When it finds
tune the radio to a desired frequency. one, it will stop and play that station
The band and frequency that the Turn the knob right to tune to a for about 10 seconds.
radio was last tuned to are displayed. higher frequency, or left to tune to a
To change bands, press the AM or lower frequency. If you do nothing, the system will
FM button. On the FM band, ST will then scan for the next strong station
be displayed if the station is SEEK − The seek function and play it for 10 seconds. When it
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo searches up and down from the plays a station you want to listen to,
reproduction on AM is not available. current frequency to find a station press the SCAN button again.
with a strong signal. To activate it,
On the AM band, AM noise press the or side of the
reduction turns on automatically. SEEK bar, then release it.

CONTINUED

Features 247
06/09/13 17:26:15 32SWA600_253

Playing the Radio

Preset − Each preset button can AUTO SELECT − If you are If you do not like the stations auto
store one frequency on AM or LW, travelling far from home and can no select has stored, you can store
and two frequencies on FM. longer receive your preset stations, other frequencies on the preset
you can use the auto select feature to buttons as previously described.
1. Select the desired band, AM, LW find stations in the local area.
or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store To turn off auto select, press the
two frequencies with each preset Press the A. SEL button. You will see A. SEL (auto select) button. This
button. A. SEL flashing in the display, and restores the presets you originally
the system goes into scan mode for set.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan several seconds. The system stores
function to tune the radio to a the frequencies of 6 FM stations in
desired station. the preset buttons.

3. Pick a preset button (1−6), and You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
hold it until you hear a beep. pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a that preset button.
total of 6 stations on each AM and
LW, and 12 stations on FM.

248 Features
06/09/13 17:26:23 32SWA600_254

Playing the Radio

With Radio Data System (RDS)

Audio System with In-dash Disc Player Audio System with In-dash Disc Changer

AM FM TA/PTY BUTTON AM FM TA/PTY BUTTON


BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON

SEEK BAR SEEK BAR

POWER/VOLUME PRESET TUNE KNOB POWER/VOLUME PRESET TUNE KNOB


KNOB BUTTONS KNOB BUTTONS

Features 249
06/09/13 17:26:32 32SWA600_255

Playing the Radio

Radio Data System (RDS) You can turn on or off the RDS Preset 1: AF ON/OFF −
With your audio system, you can function and select the RDS Alternative frequency function on or
utilize many convenient features programs. To switch the function off
provided by the radio data system and select the program, press the
(RDS). power/volume knob for more than 2 Preset 2: REG ON/OFF −
seconds with the audio system on. Regional program on or off
With the FM band selected, you can You will hear a beep. Press any of
keep listening to the same station the preset buttons (1 through 6) to Preset 3: PS DISP ON/
even if its frequency changes as you select the function. Each preset OFF − Program service function on
enter different regions while you are button has the following function. or off
travelling. Pressing the preset button switches
the function between on and off (24 Preset 4: AUTO TP ON/OFF −
The RDS function turns on H and 12H on the clock mode). Automatic traffic program on or off
automatically when you turn the
system on. If the station you are Preset 5: NEWS ON/OFF −
listening to is an RDS station, the News program on or off
frequency display will change to the
station name. Then, the system will Preset 6: CLOCK 24H/12H
automatically keep selecting the
frequency with the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
same programs. This can save you
the trouble of retuning to obtain the
same station as long as you are in the
same RDS network area.

250 Features
06/09/13 17:26:42 32SWA600_256

Playing the Radio

AF (Alternative Frequency) − CLOCK − With this function, you


This function automatically selects a can switch the clock display between
frequency with the same program in 24-hours and 12-hours.
the RDS network area.
When the signals of the RDS station
REG (Regional Program) − This become so weak that the system can
function keeps the regional program no longer follow the station, the
and does not change the frequency system will hold the last tuned
even if the signal becomes too weak. frequency and the display will
change from the station name to the
PS DISP (Program Service frequency.
Display) − This function shows the
radio station name which you are In some countries, you cannot utilize
To turn on the RDS, select 1 AF ON listening to. features provided by RDS as the
by pressing the preset 1. To turn off RDS function is not provided for all
the RDS, select 1 AF OFF. Press the AUTO TP (Automatic Traffic stations.
power/volume knob again to store Information Program) − This
the setting. function automatically tunes to the
radio station which is broadcasting
the traffic information.

NEWS (News Program) − This


function automatically tunes to the
radio station which is broadcasting
the newscast.
CONTINUED

Features 251
06/09/13 17:26:50 32SWA600_257

Playing the Radio

Program Service Name Display TA (Traffic Announcement) Standby You can receive traffic information
If the station you are listening to is Function while you are listening to a disc or
an RDS station, the frequency When you press and release the TA/ tape (if equipped). If the system is
display will disappear and the station PTY button, TA comes on in the tuned to a TP station before playing
name or PTY information will be display and the system stands by for a disc or tape, the system will stand
displayed. Press the TA/PTY button traffic announcements. by for traffic announcements with
for more than 2 seconds to switch the TA/PTY button pressed (TA
the display between the name of When the automatic traffic indicator is on) and the system will
network/station and the PTY information program (AUTO TP switch from disc or tape to the traffic
information. For more information ON) is selected, TP will come on in announcement when it begins. You
on the PTY, see page 253 . the display. This indicates that the will see TA-INFO in the display. The
traffic reports can be received from system will return to the disc or tape
the traffic information broadcasting mode when the traffic information is
station. finished.

AUTO TP cross-references other You can also switch to the normal


program services that broadcast audio mode while you are listening to
traffic information, and the traffic the traffic information by pressing
reports can be received through the TA/PTY button. It does not
another program service in the RDS cancel the TA standby function.
network area.

252 Features
06/09/13 17:26:58 32SWA600_258

Playing the Radio

To adjust the volume of the traffic Pressing the TA/PTY button will not PTY (Program Type) Display
announcement, turn the power/ turn off the TA function while you Function
volume knob while the are listening to the traffic When the TA/PTY button is pressed
announcement is broadcasting. The information. It will just switch to the for more than 2 seconds until you
adjusted volume level will be stored, selected audio playing mode. hear a beep, the PTY display
then that level will be used on the function comes on. This function
next time traffic announcement. If If you use seek or auto select with shows you the program type of the
you adjust the volume below the the TA function on, the system selected RDS station. For example, if
minimum level, the default level searches only TP stations. the station is broadcasting drama,
(level 9) will be used on the next DRAMA is shown in the display. If it
time. The volume of the PTY NEWS is a station of scientific programs,
or the PTY ALARM function can SCIENCE is shown. The principal
also be adjusted (see page 255 ). PTYs are shown as follows.

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead, NEWS: Short accounts of facts,


or is disconnected, the traffic events, publicly expressed views,
announcement volume level will be reportage, etc.
reset to the default setting (level 9). CURRENT AFFAIRS: Topical
programs expanding upon the news.
To turn off the TA function, press
the TA/PTY button again. TA will go
out from the display.

CONTINUED

Features 253
06/09/13 17:27:15 32SWA600_259

Playing the Radio

INFORMATION: General LIGHT CLASSICS M: Light classics; NATION MUSIC: National music.
information and advice. classical music for non-specialist OLDIES M: Oldies music, ‘‘Golden
SPORT: Programs concerned with appreciation. age’’ based programs.
any aspect of sports. SERIOUS CLASSICS: Traditional FOLK MUSIC: Folk music.
EDUCATION: Educational classics. DOCUMENTARY: Documentary
programs. OTHER MUSIC: Other types of programs.
DRAMA: All radio plays and serials. music, such as R & B, Reggae.
CULTURE: Programs concerned WEATHER/METR: Weather
with any aspect of national or information.
regional culture. FINANCE: Programs concerned
SCIENCE: Programs about nature, with economy.
science, and technology. CHILDREN’S PROGS: Programs for
VARIED SPEECH: Light children.
entertainment programs. RELIGION: Programs concerned
POP MUSIC: Commercial music of with religion.
popular appeal. SOCIAL AFFAIRS: Social affairs
ROCK MUSIC: Contemporary programs.
modern music. PHONE IN: Programs consisting of
EASY LISTENING: Light music. listener’s message
TRAVEL/TOURING: Programs
concerned with travel.
LEISURE/HOBBY: Programs about
hobbies and recreational activities.
JAZZ MUSIC: Jazz music.
COUNTRY MUSIC: Country music.

254 Features
06/09/13 17:27:25 32SWA600_260

Playing the Radio

When you turn the TUNE knob, the If the selected RDS station does not PTY/News Interrupt Function
display will show different PTYs (see transmit PTY data, NO PTY is To activate this function, press the
the PTYs list on the previous page). displayed. When the selected station TA/PTY button for more than 2
is not an RDS station, NO RDS is seconds and select NEWS. The
After you select the desired program displayed for about 5 seconds. system will hold the last tuned FM
type, the system will search for a station/network PTY while you are
station with the same PTY code as The PTY setting mode is cancelled if listening to the disc. With this
the selected program type. When no further steps are taken within 5 function on, playing disc is
you use this function for the first seconds after selecting the desired interrupted and the system switches
time, NEWS will appear as it was PTY with the TUNE knob. from disc mode to the FM newscast
preset at the factory. when the newscast is broadcasting
Some stations may broadcast the from the FM station.
After your desired PTY is displayed, programs with different contents
press either side of the SEEK/SKIP from their PTY code. You can change the volume level of
bar within 5 seconds. The system the interrupted newscast. Refer to
will go into the PTY search mode In the PTY search mode, the tuning page 253 for how to adjust the
and search for a station of the step is set to 50 kHz while searching volume level.
selected PTY. If there is no station on the FM band. This step changes
available in the selected PTY, NO to 100 kHz when the AF or TA When the program is changed to
PTY is displayed for about 5 seconds function is activated. another program or the frequency
and the PTY search mode is cannot be received for 10 seconds
cancelled. due to a weak signal, the system will
return to the disc mode
automatically.

CONTINUED

Features 255
06/09/13 17:27:29 32SWA600_261

Playing the Radio

Your audio system has another PTY Alarm


interrupt function (including TA PTY code ‘‘ALARM’’ is used for
function). The first activated emergency announcements, such as
interrupt function has priority over natural disasters. When this code is
the others and the indication of the received, ‘‘ALARM’’ comes on the
other interrupt function goes out. To display and the volume is changed.
activate the other interrupt function, When the alarm is cancelled, the
turn off the current interrupt system will return to the normal
function. operation mode.

256 Features
06/09/13 17:27:42 32SWA600_262

Playing the Radio

Adjusting the Sound Each mode is shown in the display as This function is set to MID as the
Press the TUNE ( ) knob it changes. Turn the TUNE default setting when the vehicle
repeatedly to display the BASS, ( ) knob to adjust the setting leaves the factory.
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, to your liking. When the level
SUBWOOFER (if equipped) and reaches centre, you will see a ‘‘C’’ in Audio System Lighting
SVC (speed-sensitive volume the display. You can use the instrument panel
compensation) settings. brightness control knob to adjust the
The system will return to the audio illumination of the audio system (see
BASS − Adjusts the bass. display about 5 seconds after you page 170 ). The audio system
stop adjusting a mode. illuminates when the position lights
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. are on, even if the radio is off.
Speed-sensitive Volume
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back Compensation (SVC)
strength of the sound. The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
BALANCE − Adjusts the balance, you go, the louder the audio volume
or side-to-side strength of the sound. becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
If equipped
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
strength of sound from the SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
subwoofer speaker. HIGH. Turn the TUNE ( )
knob to adjust the setting to your
SVC − Adjusts the volume level liking. If you feel the sound is too
according to the vehicle speed. loud, choose low. If you feel the
sound is too quiet, choose high.

Features 257
06/09/13 17:27:51 32SWA600_263

Playing a Disc

Audio System with In-dash Disc Player Audio System with In-dash Disc Changer

REPEAT BUTTON CD/AUX DISPLAY LOAD INDICATOR CD/AUX DISPLAY


BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
DISC SLOT LOAD DISC SLOT REPEAT EJECT
INDICATOR BUTTON BUTTON

EJECT LOAD
BUTTON BUTTON

SCAN SEEK/SKIP SCAN SEEK/SKIP RANDOM


BUTTON BAR BUTTON BAR BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB RANDOM BUTTON TUNE (FOLDER) POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE (FOLDER)
KNOB KNOB

258 Features
06/09/13 17:28:04 32SWA600_264

Playing a Disc

To Play a Disc This audio system can also play −Maximum layers
To load or play discs, the ignition CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in (including ROOT): 8 layers
switch must be in the ACCESSORY MP3 or WMA standard. When
(I) or ON (II) position. playing a disc in MP3, you will see The specifications of the compatible
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA WMA file are:
You operate the disc player/changer format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the −Sampling frequency:
with the same controls used for the display. You can select up to 99 32/44.1/48 kHz
radio. To select the disc player/ folders, or up to 255 tracks/files. −Bit rate: 32/40/48/64/80/96/128/
changer, press the CD/AUX button. 160/192 kbps
You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the display. The Video CDs and DVD discs do not −Compatible with variable bit rate
number of the track playing and the work in this unit. and multi-session
elapsed time are shown in the −Maximum layers
display. On the in-dash disc changer, The specifications of the compatible (including ROOT): 8 layers
the disc number is also displayed. MP3 file are:
You can also select the displayed −Sampling frequency: NOTE:
information with the DISP button 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
(see page 261 ). The system will 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) protected by digital rights
continuously play a disc until you −Bit rate: management (DRM), the audio unit
change modes. 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ displays FORMAT, and then skips to
160/192/224/256/320 kbps the next file.
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. 112/128/144/160 kbps (MPEG2)
The label can curl up and cause the −Compatible with variable bit rate
disc to jam in the unit. and multi-session
CONTINUED

Features 259
06/09/13 17:28:14 32SWA600_265

Playing a Disc

To Load a Disc in the In-dash Disc Loading Discs in the In-dash Disc You cannot load and play 8-cm
Player Changer (3-inch) discs in this unit.
Insert a disc about halfway into the Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc holds up to six discs. 4. When the disc load indicator turns
in the rest of the way and begin to green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
play it. The number of the track 1. Press the LOAD button until you display again, insert the next disc
playing is shown in the display. The hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in in the slot. Do not try to insert a
system will continuously play a disc the display. To load only one disc, disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
until you change modes. press and release the LOAD could damage the audio unit.
button.
You cannot load and play 8-cm 5. Repeat this until all six positions
(3-inch) discs in this unit. 2. The disc number for an empty are loaded. If you are not loading
position is highlighted and the red all six positions, the system begins
disc load indicator starts blinking. playing the last disc loaded.

3. Insert the disc into the disc slot You can also load a disc into an
when the green disc load indicator empty position while a disc is playing
comes on. Insert it only about by pressing the appropriate preset
halfway; the drive will pull it in the button. The system stops playing the
rest of the way. You will see current disc and starts the loading
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the sequence. It then plays the disc just
disc load indicator turns red and loaded.
blinks as the disc is loaded.

260 Features
06/09/13 17:28:22 32SWA600_266

Playing a Disc

Text Data Display Function The display shows up to about 16 When playing a CD-DA with text
Each time you press the DISP button, characters of selected text data (the data, the album and track name are
the display shows you the text data folder name, file name, etc.). If the shown in the display. With a disc in
on a disc, if the disc was recorded text data has more than 16 MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
with text data. characters, you will see the first 15 folder and file name.
characters and the > indicator in
You can see the album, artist, and the display. Press and hold the DISP
track name in the display. If a disc is button until the next 16 characters
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can are shown.
see the folder and file name, and the
artist, album, and track tag. You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display. When a new folder, file, or track is
The TRACK indicator is shown with selected.
the file or track name.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and the


system begins to play.

CONTINUED

Features 261
06/09/13 17:28:29 32SWA600_267

Playing a Disc

To Change or Select Tracks/Files SEEK/SKIP − Each time you In MP3 or WMA mode
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar press and release the side of FOLDER SELECTION − To
while a disc is playing to select the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips select a different folder, turn the
passages and change tracks (files in forward to the beginning of the next TUNE knob to move to the
MP3/WMA mode). track (file in MP3 or WMA mode). beginning of the next folder. Turn
Press and release the side to the knob to the right until it clicks
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the skip backward to the beginning of once to skip to the next folder, and to
TUNE knob to select folders in the the current track. Press it again to the left to move to the beginning of
disc and use the SEEK/SKIP bar to skip to the beginning of the previous the previous folder. Turning the
change files. track. TUNE knob more than two clicks
skips several folders.
In-dash Disc Changer To move rapidly within a track or file,
To select a different disc, use the press and hold the or side
appropriate preset buttons (1 of the SEEK/SKIP bar.
through 6). If you select an empty
position, the system will go into the
loading sequence (see page 260 ).

262 Features
06/09/13 17:28:37 32SWA600_268

Playing a Disc

REPEAT (TRACK/FILE In-dash Disc Player RANDOM (Random within a


REPEAT) − To continuously replay Each time you press and release the disc) − This feature plays the
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode), RPT button, the mode changes from tracks within a disc (the files within
press and release the RPT button. file repeat to folder repeat, then to a disc in MP3 or WMA mode) in
You will see RPT in the display. normal playing. random order. To activate random
Press and hold the RPT button for 2 play, press and release the RDM
seconds to turn it off. In-dash Disc Changer button. In MP3 or WMA mode, press
DISC-REPEAT − To continuously the RDM button repeatedly to select
In MP3 or WMA mode replay the current disc, press and RDM (within a disc random play).
FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature, release the RPT button repeatedly You will see RDM in the display.
when activated, replays all files on until you see D-RPT in the display. Press the RDM button for 2 seconds
the selected folder in the order they Press and hold the RPT button for 2 to return to normal play.
are compressed. To activate folder seconds again to turn it off.
repeat, press and release the RPT
button repeatedly until you see F- Each time you press and release the
RPT in the display. The system RPT button, the mode changes from
continuously replays the current file repeat to folder repeat, to disc
folder. Press and hold the RPT repeat then to normal playing.
button for 2 seconds to turn it off.
Selecting a different folder with the
TUNE knob also turns off the repeat
feature.

CONTINUED

Features 263
06/09/13 17:28:45 32SWA600_269

Playing a Disc

In MP3 or WMA mode SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) − In MP3 or WMA mode


FOLDER-RANDOM − This The scan function samples all tracks F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This
feature, when activated, plays all (files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in feature, when activated, samples the
files on the selected folder in random the order they are recorded on the first file of each folder on the disc.
order. To activate folder random, disc. To activate scan, press the To activate folder scan, press the
press and release the RDM button. SCAN button. In MP3 or WMA SCAN button twice. You will see
You will see F-RDM in the display. mode, press the SCAN button F-SCAN in the display.
The system will then select and play repeatedly to select SCAN. You will
files randomly. This continues until see SCAN in the display. You will get The system plays the first file in the
you deactivate folder random by a 10 second sampling of each track/ first folder for about 10 seconds. If
pressing and holding the RDM file on the disc. Press and hold the you do nothing, the system will then
button for 2 seconds, or by selecting SCAN button for about 2 seconds to play the first files in the remaining
a different folder with the TUNE get out of scan mode and play the folders for 10 seconds each. After
knob. last track/file sampled. playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
Each time you press and release the Pressing either side of the SEEK/
RDM button, the mode changes SKIP bar also turns off the scan Pressing either side of the SEEK/
from folder random play to random feature. SKIP bar, or selecting a different
play (within a disc random play), folder with the TUNE knob also
then to normal playing. turns off the scan feature.

In-dash Disc Player


Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal playing.

264 Features
06/09/13 17:28:52 32SWA600_270

Playing a Disc

In-dash Disc Changer To Stop Playing a Disc If you turn the system off while a
DISC-SCAN − This function Press the eject button ( ) to disc is playing, either with the
samples each first track of all the remove the disc. If you eject the disc, power/volume knob or by turning
discs in the in-dash disc changer in but do not remove it from the slot, off the ignition switch, the disc will
the order they are stored. To the system will automatically reload stay in the drive. When you turn the
activate disc scan, press the SCAN the disc after 10 seconds and put it in system back on, the disc will begin
button repeatedly until you will see pause mode. To begin playing, press playing where it left off.
D-SCAN in the display. The system the CD/AUX button.
will then play the first track/file of
the first disc for approximately 10 You can also eject the disc when the
seconds. After playing the first ignition switch is off.
track/file of the last disc, the system
plays normally. To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Each time you press and release the Press the CD/AUX button again to
SCAN button, the mode changes switch back to the disc player or disc
from scan to folder scan, disc scan changer.
then to normal playing.
To play the tape when a disc is
playing, insert a tape in the player
(optional). If a tape is in the player,
press the CD/AUX button. Press the
CD/AUX button again to switch
back to the disc player.

Features 265
06/09/13 17:29:00 32SWA600_271

Playing a Disc

Removing Discs from the In-dash Operating the Optional Disc If you select an empty slot in the
Disc Changer Changer magazine, the changer will search
To remove the disc currently in play, An optional six disc changer is for the next available disc to load and
press the eject ( ) button. When available for your vehicle. This disc play.
a disc is removed from a slot, the changer uses the same controls used
system automatically begins the load for the in-dash disc player/changer
sequence so you can load another or the radio.
disc in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer Load the desired discs in the
within 10 seconds, the system magazine, and load the magazine in
returns to the previous mode (AM or the changer according to the
FM). The disc will reload into the instructions that came with the unit.
system and will remain there in a
pause mode. To select the disc changer, press the
CD/AUX button. The disc and track
To remove a different disc from the numbers will be displayed. To select
changer, first select it with the a different disc, use the preset 5
appropriate preset button. When that (DISC −) button or the preset 6
disc begins playing, press the eject (DISC +) button. To select the
button. Continue pressing the eject previous disc, press the preset 5
button to remove all the discs from (DISC −), or the preset 6 (DISC +)
the changer. to select the next disc in sequence.

You can also eject discs when the


ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.

266 Features
06/09/13 17:29:04 32SWA600_272

Playing a Disc

Operating the Optional MD


Player/Changer
(For some types)
An MD player or changer is available
for your vehicle as optional
equipment. This MD player/changer
uses the same controls used for the
in-dash disc player/changer or the
radio. Follow the instructions that
came with the unit.

Features 267
06/09/13 17:29:14 32SWA600_273

Protecting Your Discs

General Information Protecting Discs


When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a disc is not being played,
use only high quality discs labelled store it in its case to protect it from
for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
system. Wipe across the disc from the centre
to the outside edge.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the A new disc may be rough on the
drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
Handle your discs properly to can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
prevent damage and skipping. recording surface of the disc, stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
causing skipping or other problems. These, along with contamination
Remove these pieces by rubbing the from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
inner and outer edges with the side pens, can cause the disc to not play
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. of a pencil or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit. Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.

268 Features
06/09/13 17:29:22 32SWA600_274

Disc Player/Changer Error Messages

If you see an error message in the


display while playing a disc, find the Error Cause Solution
cause in the chart to the right. If you Message
cannot clear the error message, take UNSUPPORTED Track/File format not Current track will skipped. The next supported
your vehicle to your dealer. FORMAT supported track or file plays automatically.
BAD DISC − Press the eject button and pull out the disc(s).
The chart on the right explains the PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
error messages you may see in the OWNERS Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt.
display while playing a disc. MANUAL Insert the disc again. If the code does not
PUSH EJECT disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed,
If you see an error message in the BAD DISC − consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc
display while playing a disc, press PLEASE CHECK Servo Error out of the player.
the eject button. After ejecting the OWNERS
disc, check it for damage or MANUAL
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again. The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.

The audio system will try to play the


disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

Features 269
06/09/13 17:29:28 32SWA600_275

Optional Disc Changer Error Messages

The chart on the right explains the


error messages you may see in the Error Cause Solution
display while playing a disc. Message
Press the magazine eject button and pull it out.
If you see an error message in the DISC ERROR FOCUS error If the message does not disappear or the
display while playing a disc, press magazine cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
the eject button. After ejecting the Press the magazine eject button and pull it out.
disc, check it for damage or Check for an error message, and insert the
deformation. If there is no damage, MECH ERROR Mechanical error magazine again. If the message does not
insert the disc again. disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see your dealer.
If there is still a problem, the error
message will appear again. Press the
eject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the new


disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

270 Features
06/09/13 17:29:36 32SWA600_276

Playing a Tape (Optional for some types)

Audio System with In-dash Disc Player Audio System with In-dash Disc Changer

CD/AUX BUTTON CD/AUX BUTTON

REPEAT SEEK BAR REPEAT SEEK BAR


BUTTON BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME PRESET TUNE KNOB POWER/VOLUME PRESET TUNE KNOB


KNOB BUTTONS KNOB BUTTONS

Features 271
06/09/13 17:29:45 32SWA600_277

Playing a Tape (Optional for some types)

To Play a Tape Dolby* noise reduction turns on To switch to the radio or disc player
(Optional for some types) when you insert a tape. The while a tape is playing, press the AM,
The ignition switch must be in the indicator will come on in the FM or CD/AUX button. To change
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. display. If the tape was not recorded back to the tape player, press the
Make sure the open side of the tape in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the CD/AUX button.
is facing right, then insert the tape preset 4 button. Dolby remains off
most of the way into the slot. The until you press the preset 4 button You can remove the tape with the
system will pull the tape in the rest again. ignition switch in any position, even
of the way, and begin to play it. if the audio system is off.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
The tape direction indicator comes license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Tape Search Functions
on to show you which side of the Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol FF/REW − To rewind the tape,
tape is playing. The △ indicates the are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories push the preset 1 button. You will
side you inserted upward is now Licensing Corporation. see REW in the display. To fast
playing. If you want to play the other forward the tape, push the preset 3
side, press the preset 2 button. When To Stop Playing a Tape button. You will see FF displayed.
the player reaches the end of the To remove the tape, press the eject Press the preset 1, 2, or 3 button to
tape, it will automatically reverse button on the tape player. If you take the system out of rewind or fast
direction and play the other side. want to turn the player off, press the forward.
power/volume knob or turn off the
ignition switch. The tape will remain
in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the tape player will
be in pause mode. Press the preset 2
button to resume play.

272 Features
06/09/13 17:29:53 32SWA600_278

Playing a Tape (Optional for some types)

SKIP − Press the side of the Caring for the Tape Player Store tapes in their cases to protect
SEEK/SKIP bar to find the The tape player picks up dirt and them from dust and moisture. Never
beginning of the current song or oxides from the tape. This place tapes where they will be
passage. Press the side to find contamination builds up over time exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
the beginning of the next song or and causes the sound quality to or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
passage. When the system reaches degrade. To prevent this, you should to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
the beginning of a song or passage, it clean the player after every 30 hours moderate temperature before
begins to play it. of use. inserting it into the player.

REPEAT − Press the RPT button If you do not clean the tape player Never try to insert a foreign object
to continuously play a song or regularly, it may eventually become into the tape player.
passage. You will see RPT displayed. impossible to remove the
The track will repeat until you press contamination with a normal
the RPT button again. cleaning kit.

NOTE: The skip and repeat Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.


functions use silent periods on the Tapes longer than that may break or
tape to find the end of a song or jam in the drive.
passage. These features may not
work if there is almost no gap If the tape is loose, tighten it by
between selections, a high noise turning the hub with a pencil or your
level, or a silent period in the middle finger. If the label is peeling off,
of a selection. remove it or it could cause the tape
to jam in the player. Never try to
insert a warped or damaged tape in
the player.

Features 273
06/09/13 17:30:01 32SWA600_279

Remote Audio Controls (For some types)

MODE BUTTON The MODE button changes the If you are playing a disc, the system
mode. Pressing the button skips to the beginning of the next
repeatedly selects FM, AM (MW), track (file in MP3 or WMA format)
LW, disc (if a disc is loaded), or a each time you press the top (+) of
tape (if equipped). You can select the CH button. Press the bottom
FM1 and FM2 when the auto select (−) to return to the beginning of the
feature is not used. current track or file. Press it twice to
return to the previous track or file.
If you are listening to the radio, use You will see the track/file number
the CH button to change stations. and the elapsed time. If the disc has
Each time you press and release the text data or is compressed in MP3 or
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON top (+) of the button, the system WMA, you can also see any other
goes to the next preset station on the information (track title, file name,
Three controls for the audio system band you are listening to. Press and folder name, etc.).
are mounted in the steering wheel release the bottom (−) to go back to
hub. These let you control basic the previous station. In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
functions without removing your the seek function to select folders.
hand from the wheel. To activate the seek function, press Press and hold the top (+) of the
and hold the top (+) or bottom (−) CH button until you hear a beep, to
The VOL button adjusts the volume of the CH button until you hear a skip forward to the first file of the
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top beep. The system searches up or next folder. Press the bottom (−) to
or bottom of the button, hold it until down from the current frequency to skip backward to the previous folder.
the desired volume is reached, then find a station with a strong signal.
release it.

274 Features
06/09/13 17:30:07 32SWA600_280

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

If you are playing a tape in the Auxiliary Input Jack


optional tape player, press the top (For some types)
(+) of the CH button to advance to
the next selection. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
selection. The system senses a silent
period, then resumes playing.

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

The auxiliary input jack is in the


console compartment. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories.

When a compatible audio unit is


connected to the jack, press the CD/
AUX button to select it.

Features 275
06/09/13 17:30:13 32SWA600_281

Radio Theft Protection

On vehicles with standard audio system If your vehicle’s battery is


Your vehicle’s audio system will disconnected or goes dead, or the
disable itself if it is disconnected radio fuse is removed, the audio
from electrical power for any reason. system will disable itself. If this
To make it work again, you must happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
enter a specific digit code using the CODE’’ in the frequency display the
preset buttons (icon on vehicle with next time you turn on the system.
navigation system). Because there Use the preset buttons to enter the
are hundreds of number code. On vehicles with navigation
combinations possible from specific system, touch the icon to enter the
digits, making the system work code number, then touch the Done
without knowing the exact code is icon to set the code. The code is on
nearly impossible. the radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
You should have received a card that entered correctly, the radio will start
lists your audio system’s code and playing.
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In If you make a mistake entering the
addition, you should write the audio code, do not start over; complete the
system’s serial number in this owner’s sequence, then enter the correct
manual. code. You have ten tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
If you lose the card, you must obtain in ten attempts, you must then leave
the code number from a dealer. To the system on for 1 hour before
do this, you will need the system’s trying again.
serial number.

276 Features
06/09/13 17:30:20 32SWA600_282

Setting the Clock

On vehicles with audio system


(without navigation system) CLOCK BUTTON (AM)
To set the time, press the CLOCK
(AM) button until you hear a beep.
The displayed time begins to blink.

Change the hour by pressing the H


(preset 1) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minute by pressing the M
(preset 2) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again to


enter the set time.

HOUR BUTTON RESET BUTTON


(PRESET 1) (PRESET 3)
MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 2)
Audio system with in-dash disc changer is shown.

CONTINUED

Features 277
06/09/13 17:30:25 32SWA600_283

Setting the Clock

You can quickly set the time to the On vehicles with navigation system
nearest hour. If the displayed time is The navigation system receives
before the half hour, pressing the signals from the global positioning
CLOCK button until you hear a beep, system (GPS), and the displayed
then pressing the R (preset 3) button time is updated automatically by the
sets the clock back to the previous GPS. Refer to the navigation system
hour. If the displayed time is after manual for how to adjust the time.
the half hour, the clock sets forward
to the beginning of the next hour.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00


1:53 will reset to 2:00

278 Features
06/09/13 17:30:32 32SWA600_284

Security System (For some types)

The security system helps to protect The security system sets


your vehicle and valuables from theft. automatically 15 seconds (25
The horn sounds (the beeping alarm seconds on vehicles equipped with
on vehicles with ultrasonic sensor) the ultrasonic sensor activated) after
and the turn signal lights flash if you lock the doors, bonnet, and
someone attempts to break into your tailgate. For the system to activate,
vehicle or remove the audio unit. you must lock the doors and the
This alarm continues for 30 seconds, tailgate from the outside with the
then the system resets. key or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator on the
To turn off an alarming system instrument panel starts blinking
before 30 seconds have elapsed, SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR immediately to show you the system
unlock the driver’s door with the is setting itself.
ignition key or the remote On vehicles with the ultrasonic
transmitter. sensor, only the remote transmitter To set the ultrasonic sensor along
can turn off the security system. with the security system, you should
Unlocking the driver’s door with the lock the doors and the tailgate with
key cannot turn off the security the key or the remote transmitter.
system and activates the alarm.

CONTINUED

Features 279
06/09/13 17:30:39 32SWA600_285

Security System (For some types)

When you lock the doors and the Once the security system is set, The security system will not set if
tailgate with the key or the remote opening any door or tailgate (without the bonnet, tailgate, or any door is
transmitter, all outside turn signals using the key or the remote not fully closed. If the system will not
and both indicators in the instrument transmitter), or the bonnet, will set, check the door and tailgate open
panel flash three times to verify the cause it to alarm. It also alarms if the monitor on the multi-information
doors and the tailgate are locked and audio unit is removed from the display (see page 116 ), to see if the
the security system has set. When dashboard or the wiring is cut. doors and tailgate are fully closed.
you unlock them, these lights flash On vehicles with information display,
once. The alarm will also be activated if the door and tailgate open monitor is
the passenger inside the locked in the information display (see page
The security system also sets after vehicle turns the ignition switch on. 95 ). Since it is not part of the
you lock the doors and the tailgate monitor display, manually check the
with the lock tab or master door lock On vehicles with super locking system bonnet.
switch on the driver’s door while When you set the super locking
pulling the outside door handle. along with the security system, the Do not attempt to alter this system
alarm is not activated if someone or add other devices to it.
tries to open a door with the lock
tabs or the master door lock switch.

280 Features
06/09/13 17:30:45 32SWA600_286

Security System (For some types)

Ultrasonic Sensor Whether the ultrasonic sensor is


(For some types) activated or not, the security system
If you set the security system with can only be turned off by the remote
ULTRASONIC SENSORS
the windows open, the ultrasonic transmitter, not the key.
sensor may activate the alarm
unexpectedly when the system
senses strong vibrations on the
vehicle or loud sound.

You can set the security system


without activating the ultrasonic
sensor. Pull the driver’s outside door
handle and pull the lock tab rearward.
Release the handle, then close the
door. The security system indicator
The ultrasonic sensor is only on the instrument panel comes on
activated when the security system for 3 seconds, then starts blinking.
is set by the key or the remote
transmitter. It monitors the interior
of the vehicle and activates the alarm
if someone intrudes into the
passenger compartment through a
window, or moves in the
compartment. With the security
system set, only the ultrasonic
sensor may activate.

Features 281
06/09/13 17:30:54 32SWA600_287

Cruise Control (For some types)

Cruise control allows you to maintain Using Cruise Control 3. Press and release the SET/
a set speed above 40 km/h (25 mph) DECEL button on the steering
without keeping your foot on the RES/ACCEL wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
accelerator pedal. It should be used indicator on the instrument panel
for cruising on straight, open comes on to show the system is
motorways. It is not recommended now activated.
for city driving, winding roads, CRUISE
slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad BUTTON Cruise control may not hold the set
weather. speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
Improper use of the cruise CANCEL SET/DECEL the cruise control. To resume the set
control can lead to a crash. speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
1. Push in the CRUISE button on the The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
Use the cruise control only steering wheel. The CRUISE on the instrument panel will come
when travelling on open MAIN indicator on the instrument back on.
motorways in good weather. panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising automatic transmission may
speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). downshift to hold the set speed.

282 Features
06/09/13 17:31:03 32SWA600_288

Cruise Control (For some types)

Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising Even with cruise control turned on,
You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: you can still use the accelerator
speed in any of these ways: pedal to speed up for passing. After
NOTE: If you need to decrease your completing the pass, take your foot
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL speed quickly, use the brakes as you off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
button. When you reach the normally would. will return to the set cruising speed.
desired cruising speed, release the
button. Press and hold the SET/DECEL Resting your foot on the brake or
button. Release the button when clutch pedal causes cruise control to
Push on the accelerator pedal. you reach the desired speed. cancel.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/ To slow down in very small
DECEL button. amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
To increase the speed in very your vehicle will slow down about
small amounts, tap the RES/ 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up Tap the brake or clutch pedal
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph). lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.

Features 283
06/09/13 17:31:10 32SWA600_289

Cruise Control (For some types)

Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed


You can cancel cruise control in any When you push the CANCEL button,
of these ways: or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the
Tap the brake or clutch pedal. previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
Push the CANCEL button on the above 40 km/h (25 mph), then press
steering wheel. and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
Push the CRUISE button on the comes on, and the vehicle will
steering wheel. accelerate to the same cruising
speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turns


the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.

284 Features
06/09/13 17:31:17 32SWA600_290

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

ACC Components
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
consists of a radar sensor in the MULTI-INFORMATION ACC INDICATOR (Amber)
DISPLAY ACC INDICATOR (Green)
front grille, the ACC buttons on the
steering wheel, and the ACC
functions of the multi-information
display.
RES/ACCEL
The radar sensor for ACC is shared BUTTON
with the collision mitigation brake ACC SET/DECEL
system (CMBS). For more BUTTON BUTTON
information on the radar sensor, see
page 369 . For more information on
CMBS, see page 368 .

DISTANCE BUTTON CANCEL BUTTON

Features 285
06/09/13 17:31:28 32SWA600_291

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Overview If the vehicle ahead of you slows Do not use ACC under these
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) allows down suddenly or another vehicle conditions:
you to maintain a set speed and keep cuts in front of your vehicle, ACC
the vehicle ahead of you and your alerts you by sounding a beeper and In poor visibility.
vehicle at a safe distance without displaying a symbol ‘‘ ’’ (a
having to use the accelerator pedal ‘‘BRAKE’’ message depending on the In heavy traffic.
or the brake pedal. customize setting) on the multi-
information display. When you must slow down and
speed up repeatedly.
When the vehicle ahead of you slows The ACC radar sensor in the front
down or speeds up, ACC senses the grille can detect and monitor the On winding roads.
change in distance and compensates distance of a vehicle up to 100
by accelerating or braking your meters (328 feet) ahead of your On steep downhills.
vehicle to reach the cruising speed vehicle.
you previously set. The distance When you enter a toll gate,
between vehicles is based on your Important Safety Precautions interchange, service area, parking
speed: the faster you go, the longer As with any system, there are limits area, etc. In these areas, there is
the distance will be; the slower you to ACC. Inappropriate use of ACC no vehicle ahead of you, but ACC
go, the shorter it will be. can result in a serious accident. Use would still try to accelerate to your
the brake pedal whenever necessary, set speed.
and always keep a safe distance
between your vehicle and other
vehicles.

286 Features
06/09/13 17:31:37 32SWA600_292

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

In bad weather (rain, fog, snow, Operating Characteristics


etc.)

On slippery roads (for example,


roads covered with ice or snow).

Improper use of ACC can lead


to a crash.

Use ACC only when


travelling on open
motorways in good weather.
When there is no vehicle ahead within When a vehicle ahead is within ACC
ACC range range and going slower than your set
Your vehicle will maintain a set speed
cruising speed. If the vehicle ahead of you is going
slower than your set speed, your
vehicle will slow down to the speed
of that vehicle. Your vehicle will then
follow at a constant distance until the
vehicle ahead changes speed again.

CONTINUED

Features 287
06/09/13 17:31:45 32SWA600_293

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

If the vehicle ahead of you slows


down abruptly, or if another vehicle
cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds
and a symbol ‘‘ ’’ or a
‘‘BRAKE’’ message appears on the
multi-information display to warn
you.

In the case, decelerate your vehicle


by pressing the brake pedal, and
keep an appropriate distance from
the vehicle ahead.

When a vehicle ahead is within ACC If the vehicle ahead of you changes
range and going at a steady speed lanes, ACC no longer tracks it. Your
Your vehicle follows the vehicle vehicle will then return to your set
ahead of it, keeping a constant speed.
distance. ACC will not keep your
vehicle at a constant distance if the When the brakes are automatically
vehicle ahead of you goes out of applied, the system may make some
range of your set speed: above 180 noise. However, it is not a
km/h (112 mph) or below 30 km/h malfunction.
(20 mph).

288 Features
06/09/13 17:31:53 32SWA600_294

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Shift Up/Shift Down Indications This indicates that the shifting point To protect the engine from damage,
of the engine performance limit never drive with the tachometer
Shift Down
corresponding to the gear which you reading in the red zone.
Shift Up
select. Shifting up or down when
prompted by the shift up or down If you ignore either shift up or shift
indication allows the engine to run down indication, the ACC will be
and accelerate smoothly. This helps cancelled after about 10 seconds. For
to keep the ACC operation. the information of the automatic
ACC cancellation and resuming the
The shift up indication will be ACC, see page 298 .
displayed when the engine speed
reaches about 5,500 rpm on petrol
models, and about 4,200 rpm on
diesel models. At 6,000 rpm on petrol
On vehicles with manual transmission models, and 4,500 rpm on diesel
With the adaptive cruise control models, the ACC will be deactivated.
system on, either shift up or shift The ACC will be cancelled when the
down indication comes on to show engine speed goes into the
you the appropriate time to shift to a tachometer’s red zone. The shift
higher or lower gear. down indication will be displayed
appropriately according to the
deceleration. If the engine speed
goes to below 1,000 rpm, the ACC
will also be cancelled.

Features 289
06/09/13 17:31:58 32SWA600_295

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Limitations ACC may react to vehicles beside


ACC does not work below 25 you or even buildings beside you
km/h (17 mph). It cannot bring by momentarily applying the
your vehicle to a complete stop. brakes or sounding a beeper under
some conditions like the sudden
ACC will not sound a beeper or curve, the narrow lane, the abrupt
display a symbol or a message on operation of the steering wheel, or
the multi-information display to the position of your vehicle in the
warn you of vehicles going slower lane.
than 20 km/h (13 mph) or
vehicles that are parked. In these
cases, it is up to you to maintain a
safe distance by using the brake
pedal.

ACC may not recognize


motorcycles or other small
vehicles ahead of your vehicle.

290 Features
06/09/13 17:32:07 32SWA600_296

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) This indicator comes on when there Always keep the emblem clean. If it
Indicator (Amber) is a problem with the ACC system. gets dirty, clean it with water or a
You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ mild detergent. Never use chemical
ACC INDICATOR or the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK solvents or polishing powder.
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display. If this happens, Do not allow anything to impact the
take the vehicle to your dealer to radar sensor or the emblem. If the
have it checked. The ACC system front grille ever needs to be repaired,
cannot be used while this indicator is consult a dealer first.
on.

If the emblem is covered with mud,


dirt, wet snow, etc., or if a sticker is
on the emblem, the radar sensor of
the ACC will be deactivated and the
When you turn the ignition switch to ACC will not work. In this case, the
the ON (II) position, the ACC ACC indicator will come on amber
indicator comes on amber for several and you will also see the symbol
seconds. ‘‘ ’’ and ‘‘ ,’’ or the symbol
with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display. If
this happens, the CMBS indicator
will also comes on, and the CMBS
system warning symbol/message
will be displayed on the multi-
information display.

Features 291
06/09/13 17:32:15 32SWA600_297

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Using the ACC 3. Press and release the SET/


DECEL button on the steering
wheel.

If you press the SET/DECEL button


when the vehicle speed is below
ACC approximately 30 km/h (20 mph),
BUTTON
you will hear three beeps. This
means ACC is not activated, and you
cannot set your speed.

SET/DECEL BUTTON

1. Push the ACC button on the When your speed reaches 30 km/h
steering wheel. The ACC indicator (20 mph), ACC goes into wait mode,
on the instrument panel comes on and you will see a symbol as shown
green, and you will see the symbol above or ‘‘ACC STANDBY’’ message
‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with an on the multi-information display.
‘‘ACC’’ message on the multi-
information display.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed


above 30 km/h (20 mph).

292 Features
06/09/13 17:32:23 32SWA600_298

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

SET VEHICLE SET VEHICLE SPEED PREVIOUSLY SET SPEED


DISTANCE

INITIAL SPEED UNIT MEASUREMENT


Left-hand drive type is shown. Left-hand drive type is shown. Left-hand drive type is shown.

When the speed is set, it is shown If you change the speed unit If you cancel ACC by pressing the
along with a vehicle icon and measurement from the factory CANCEL button or by tapping the
distance bars on the multi- default setting, the initial speed unit brake pedal, the previously set
information display. measurement is shown under the cruising speed is shown on the multi-
current unit. information display. To store this
Refer to page 296 for how to set and speed as your new cruising speed,
change the set distance between press and release the RES/ACCEL
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of button.
you.

To change the speed unit


measurement, see page 142 .

Features 293
06/09/13 17:32:32 32SWA600_299

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Increasing the Set Speed Press and hold the RES/ACCEL To increase the set speed with the
button. The vehicle will accelerate. accelerator pedal, press the
When you reach the speed you want, accelerator pedal to increase to the
release the button. speed you want, then press the SET/
DECEL button. The set speed will be
To increase your speed in small shown on the multi-information
amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL display.
button repeatedly. Each time you do
this, the setting speed increases by 5 If you do not press the SET/DECEL
km/h (2 mph). button, your vehicle will return to the
previously set speed. The ACC
While the vehicle accelerates to the beeper will not sound while you
RES/ACCEL BUTTON set speed, the set speed on the multi- press the accelerator pedal, no
information display will flash. matter how close you get to the
The set speed can be increased vehicle ahead of you.
using the RES/ACCEL button or the If a vehicle ahead of you is driving at
accelerator pedal. a slower speed than the speed you
want to set, your vehicle will not
To increase the set speed with the accelerate; it will keep some distance
RES/ACCEL button, do this: between your vehicles.

294 Features
06/09/13 17:32:42 32SWA600_300

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Decreasing the Set Speed To slow down in small amounts, tap To decrease the set speed with the
the SET/DECEL button repeatedly. brake pedal, do this:
RES/ACCEL BUTTON Each time you do this, the setting
speed decreases by 5 km/h (2 mph). Tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle slows down to the speed you
The set cruising speed will be shown want, press the SET/DECEL button.
on the multi-information display. The set speed will be shown on the
multi-information display. If you use
On a steep downhill, the vehicle the brake pedal to decrease speed,
speed may exceed the set cruising and then press the RES/ACCEL
speed. button, your vehicle will return to the
previously set speed.
SET/DECEL BUTTON
On vehicles with manual transmission
The set speed can be decreased When the ACC is activated, shifting
using the SET/DECEL button or the to a lower gear does not slow down
brake pedal. the vehicle speed. To slow down,
always press the brake pedal.
To decrease the set speed with the
SET/DECEL button, do this:

Press and hold the SET/DECEL


button. Release the button when you
reach the speed you want.

Features 295
06/09/13 17:32:50 32SWA600_301

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Detecting a Vehicle Ahead of You Changing Vehicle Distance


SOLID-LINE VEHICLE ICON DOTTED-LINE VEHICLE ICON DISTANCE BUTTON

Left-hand drive type is shown. Left-hand drive type is shown.

When the system detects a vehicle If there is no vehicle ahead of you With ACC on, the distance between
ahead of you, a solid-line vehicle icon within ACC range, a dotted-line your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of
appears. vehicle icon will be on the multi- you is controlled and maintained.
information display. You can change this distance to one
To set the pre-running detect beeper of three ranges: long, middle, or
on when the system detects a vehicle, You can customize the ‘‘Pre-Running short.
see page 141 . On the default setting, Car Detect Beep’’ setting (see pages
the pre-running detect beeper is set 140 and 141 ).
to off.

296 Features
06/09/13 17:32:59 32SWA600_302

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

To change the range, press the The distance you select is also
DISTANCE button. Each time you shown on the multi-information
press the button, the range changes The driver must in all circumstances display.
from Long, to Middle, and then to preserve a sufficient braking
Short. distance from the vehicle which LONG RANGE
precedes it and be aware that
The higher your vehicle speed is, the minimum distances or times of
longer the distance between the spacing can be provided by the
vehicle in front will be set as shown provisions of the Motorway Code
below. locally applicable and that it is the
Three horizontal bars
driver’s responsibility to respect
80 km/h 104 km/h those laws. MIDDLE RANGE
(50 mph) (65 mph)
Long 47 metres 61 metres
(154 feet) (200 feet)
(2.1 sec) (2.1 sec)
Middle 34 metres 42 metres
(111 feet) (138 feet) Two horizontal bars
(1.5 sec) (1.5 sec) SHORT RANGE
Short 26 metres 31 metres
(85 feet) (101 feet)
(1.2 sec) (1.1 sec)

One horizontal bar


Left-hand drive type is shown.

Features 297
06/09/13 17:33:08 32SWA600_303

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Cancelling the ACC When you push the CANCEL button Automatic ACC Cancellation
or tap the brake pedal to cancel ACC, When ACC is automatically
the set cruising speed stays in cancelled, the beeper sounds three
memory. When you turn on ACC times, and an ACC OFF message
again, the speed is shown on the appears on the multi-information
multi-information display. To return display for 3 seconds.
to that speed, accelerate to over 30
km/h (20 mph), then press the RES/
ACCEL button.

If you cancel ACC by pressing the


ACC button, the previously set
CANCEL BUTTON cruising speed is erased from
memory.
ACC is cancelled whenever you do
any of these actions:

Push the CANCEL button on the


steering wheel.

Tap the brake pedal.

Press the ACC button. The ACC


indicator (green) on the
instrument panel goes off.

298 Features
06/09/13 17:33:21 32SWA600_304

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Any of these conditions may cause When the trailer stability assist If ACC is cancelled by any of these
ACC to cancel: function is activated. conditions, wait until the condition
improves, then press the RES/
The vehicle speed decreases to When the ABS or VSA indicator ACCEL button to restore ACC.
below approximately 25 km/h (17 comes on. When you do this, the vehicle will
mph). resume its set cruising speed.
On vehicles with manual transmission
Poor weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) Ignoring either shift up or down If you turn the ignition switch to the
indication on the multi-information ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
When the radar sensor in the front display will cancel the ACC after position after ACC was automatically
grille gets dirty. about 10 seconds. cancelled, the set speed is erased,
and you must enter it again (see
The vehicle ahead of you cannot The engine speed goes into the page 292 ).
be detected. tachometer’s red zone.

An abnormal tyre condition is The engine speed goes to below


detected or the tyres are skidding. 1000 rpm.

Driving on a mountainous road, or Press and hold the clutch pedal for
driving off road for extended a while at shifting.
periods.
Shift into a higher or lower gear
Abrupt steering wheel movement. through shifting into neutral
position temporarily.
When the ABS or VSA is activated.

Features 299
06/09/13 17:33:28 32SWA600_305

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Symbols on the Multi-information


Display Symbol/Message Description
The multi-information display shows
various symbols related to ACC. For
a description of each ACC symbol
you may see, refer to the charts as
follows. ACC is on.

ACC is suspended.

A cruising speed can be set by


pressing the SET/DECEL button.

ACC is standby, and the previously


set cruising speed is in memory. The
previously set speed can be resumed
by pressing the RES/ACCEL button.
Left-hand drive type
shown

300 Features
06/09/13 17:33:38 32SWA600_306

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

Symbol/Message Description Symbol/Message Description

ACC has been automatically cancelled


because of poor weather or other
ACC detects a vehicle ahead of you. conditions (see page 299 ).

Left-hand drive type You will hear three beeps.


shown

Apply the brakes immediately. Your


ACC does not detect a vehicle ahead vehicle is too close to the vehicle
of you. ahead of it.

Left-hand drive type You will hear a continuous beep.


shown

ACC needs to be checked.


ACC has been automatically cancelled
because its radar sensor in the front Have your vehicle checked by a
grille is dirty. dealer.

CONTINUED

Features 301
06/09/13 17:33:44 32SWA600_307

Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)

(EU models)
Symbol/Message Description EC Directives
This radar sensor system complies
On vehicle with with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
manual transmission and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment and the mutual
Shift up. recognition of their conformity)
Directives.

On vehicle with
manual transmission

Shift down.

302 Features
06/09/13 17:33:52 32SWA600_308

Parking Sensor System (For some types)

Your vehicle has a parking sensor


system. The system lets you know
the approximate distance between
your vehicle and most obstacles
while you are parking. When the
system is on and your vehicle is
nearing an obstacle, you will hear a
beeping and see parking sensor
indicators on the multi-information
display or the information display, INFORMATION MULTI-
depending on models. DISPLAY INFORMATION
DISPLAY
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM BUTTON

To activate the system, push the The system has two front corner
button on the dashboard with the sensors, two rear corner sensors,
ignition switch in the ON (II) and a rear centre sensor.
position. The indicator in the button The rear centre sensors work when
comes on when the system is on. the shift lever is in reverse (R), and
You will hear a beep. To turn the the vehicle speed is less than 8 km/h
system off, push the button again. (5 mph).

All obstacles may not always be


sensed. Even when the system is on,
you should look for obstacles near
your vehicle to make sure it is safe to
park. CONTINUED

Features 303
06/09/13 17:34:01 32SWA600_309

Parking Sensor System (For some types)

The corner sensors work only when Corner Sensor Operation


the shift lever is in any position Example shown: Obstacle is at the left front of the vehicle
(except for Park on vehicles with
automatic transmission) and the About 40-50 cm About 30-40 cm About 30 cm
vehicle speed is less than 8 km/h (5 (16-20 in) (12-16 in) (12 in) or less
mph).

Indicators and Beeper Operation Distance


on the Multi-information Display/
Information Display
When you turn the system on, a
beeper sounds once.

When the system senses an obstacle, Upper left indicator stays on


the appropriate indicator comes on,
and a beeper sounds as shown in the
following tables.
Indicator

INFORMATION DISPLAY MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

Continuous
Beeper Short beeps Very short beeps
beep

304 Features
06/09/13 17:34:09 32SWA600_310

Parking Sensor System (For some types)

Rear Centre Sensor Operation

About 1-1.8 m About 0.6-1 m About 0.6 m


(40-70 in) (24-40 in) (24 in) or less

Distance

On vehicles with multi-information


Bottom indicator stays on display
If the system develops a problem,
you will see all indicators or the
indicators with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’
Indicator message on the multi-information
display, and a beeper sounds
continuously.

INFORMATION DISPLAY MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

Beeper Short beeps Very short beeps Continuous


beeps
CONTINUED

Features 305
06/09/13 17:34:15 32SWA600_311

Parking Sensor System (For some types)

Very often, a sensor covered with


mud, ice, snow, etc. is the cause of
this display. Check the sensors first.
If the indicators stay on or the
beeper does not stop, have the
system checked by your dealer.

Within about 50 cm (20 in)

On vehicles with information display The range of the corner sensors and
If the system develops a problem, the rear centre sensor are limited.
you will see all parking sensor Each corner sensor is capable of
indicators in the information display, sensing an obstacle only when your
and a beeper sounds continuously. vehicle is 50 cm (20 in) or closer.
Very often, a sensor covered with
mud, ice, snow, etc. is the cause of
this indication. Check the sensors
first. If the indicators stays on or the
beeper does not stop, have the
system checked by your dealer.

306 Features
06/09/13 17:34:24 32SWA600_312

Parking Sensor System (For some types)

The system may not function The system may not sense thin or
properly under these conditions: low objects, or sonic-absorptive
materials such as snow, cotton, or
The sensors are covered with sponge.
snow, ice, mud, etc.
The system cannot sense objects
When the vehicle is on a rough directly under the bumper.
road, on grass, or on a hill.

After the vehicle has been sitting


out in hot or cold weather.
Within about 1.8 m (70 in)
When the system is affected by
The rear centre sensor senses an some electrical equipment or
obstacle that is behind your vehicle devices generating an ultrasonic
1.8 m (70 in) or closer. wave.

Do not put any accessories on or When operating the vehicle in bad


around the sensors. weather.

Features 307
06/09/13 17:34:31 32SWA600_313

Rearview Camera and Monitor (For some types)

On vehicles with navigation system When in reverse, the touch screen


and navigation system ‘‘hard’’
buttons are locked out, except the
‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘▼’’
or ‘‘▲’’ button allows you to adjust
the brightness of the rearview
camera image.

The camera brightness cannot be


REARVIEW adjusted by voice control.
CAMERA
Since the rearview camera display
Whenever you shift to reverse (R) area is limited, you should always
with the ignition switch in the ON back up slowly and carefully, and
(II) position, the rear view is shown look behind you for obstacles.
on the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep the


rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.

308 Features
06/09/13 17:34:40 32SWA600_314

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

Optional on vehicles with navigation Voice Control To use the HFT system, your phone
system HFT system recognizes simple voice must have approved Bluetooth
Your vehicle is equipped with the commands, such as phone numbers capability along with the Hands Free
Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) and names. It uses these commands Profile. This type of phone is
system. HFT system uses Bluetooth to automatically dial, receive, and available through many phone
technology as a wireless link store numbers. For more makers and network operators.
between it and your Bluetooth information on voice control, see
compatible mobile phone. When you Using Voice Control on page 312 . Incoming/Outgoing Calls
are in your vehicle and your phone is With a linked phone, the HFT
linked to the HFT system, you’ll Bluetooth Wireless Technology system allows you to send and
enjoy hands-free phone use. The Bluetooth is a registered trademark receive calls in your vehicle without
HFT system is available in any of the of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. holding the phone.
five languages; English, French, Bluetooth is the wireless technology
Italian, German, and Spanish. To that links your phone to the HFT
change the language, see page 326 . system. The HFT system uses a
Class 2 Bluetooth, which means the
The available language is set to maximum range between your
English as the default setting when phone and vehicle is 10 meters (30
your vehicle leaves the factory. The feet).
voice of the HFT system is set to
female.

Here are the main features of the


HFT system. Instructions for using
the HFT system begin on page 312 .

Features 309
06/09/13 17:34:50 32SWA600_315

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

Phonebook HFT Buttons Here is the function of each HFT


The HFT system can store up to 50 button:
names and phone numbers in its
phonebook. With a linked phone, you HFT Talk: This button is used
can then automatically dial any name before you give a command, to
or number in the phonebook. answer incoming calls, and to
confirm system information.
Here are the main components of
the HFT system: HFT HFT Back: This button is used to
TALK end a call, go back to the previous
BUTTON
Microphone voice control command, and to
The HFT system microphone is on cancel an operation.
the ceiling console. The microphone HFT BACK BUTTON
is shared with the navigation system.
To operate the HFT, use the HFT
Audio System Talk and Back buttons on the left
When the HFT system is in use, the side of the steering wheel. Below the
sound comes through the vehicle’s HFT buttons is another set of voice
front audio system speakers. If the control buttons for the navigation,
audio system is in use while climate control, and audio systems.
operating either of HFT buttons or
making a call, the HFT system over-
rides the audio system. To change
the volume level, use the audio
system volume knob.

310 Features
06/09/13 17:34:56 32SWA600_316

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

Information Display

When you are operating the HFT When you are operating the HFT,
you are dialing and receiving calls, dialing or receiving calls with the
you will see ‘‘TEL’’ on the navigation audio system in use, you will see the
display. symbol and ‘‘TEL’’ on the navigation
display.
‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed if
your phone is linked to the Bluetooth
compatible cell phone.

Features 311
06/09/13 17:35:05 32SWA600_317

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

How to Use the HFT System Using Voice Control To hear a list of available options
The HFT system is operated by the Here are some guidelines for using at any time, press the Talk button,
HFT Talk and Back buttons on the voice control: wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands
left side of the steering wheel. The To enter a command, press the free link help.’’
next few pages provide instructions Talk button. Then, after the beep,
for all basic features of the HFT say your command in a clear, Many commands can be spoken
system. natural tone. together. For example, you can
say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’
NOTE: All phones may not operate For best system operation, set the
identically, and some may cause climate control fan speed to low, To enter a string of numbers in a
inconsistent operation of the HFT and direct the centre vents away Call or Dial command, you can say
system. from the microphone in the ceiling. them all at once, or you can
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
If the HFT system does not 10, or 11.
recognize a command, its
response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’ If it doesn’t To skip a voice prompt, press the
recognize the command a second Talk button while the HFT system
time, its response is, ‘‘Please is speaking. The HFT system will
repeat.’’ If it doesn’t recognize the then begin listening for your next
command a third time, it plays the command.
Help prompt.

312 Features
06/09/13 17:35:13 32SWA600_318

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

To go back one step in a command When you finish a command Setting Up the System
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press sequence, the HFT system goes The incoming notification of the
the Back button. back to its main menu. For HFT system can be set to a ring tone,
If nothing is said while the HFT example, when you store the name, a prompt, or no notification.
system is listening for a command, ‘‘Eric,’’ the HFT system response
the HFT system will time out and is, ‘‘Eric has been stored.’’ The To set up the system, do this:
stop its voice recognition. The next time you press the Talk 1. Press and release the Talk button.
next time you press the Talk button, you will be at the main After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
button, the HFT system begins menu. HFT system response is, ‘‘System
listening from the point at which it options are setup and clear.’’
timed out.
2. Press and release the Talk button.
To end a command sequence at After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The
any time, press and hold the Back HFT system response is ‘‘Would
button, or press the Talk button, you like an audible notification of
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ an incoming call?’’
The next time you press the Talk
button, the HFT system begins
from its main menu.

CONTINUED

Features 313
06/09/13 17:35:20 32SWA600_319

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

3. Press and release the Talk button. If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you will If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set your
If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the hear a ring tone through the audio password. Refer to the setting
HFT system response is, ‘‘Would speakers to announce an incoming procedure in the next column.
you like the notification to be a call. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you
ring tone or a prompt?’’ If you say will hear this message to
‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFT announce an incoming call: ‘‘You
system returns to its main menu. have an incoming call.’’
Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no ring
tone or prompt playback during an 5. The HFT system response
incoming call. The audio system continues ‘‘A security option is
will be mute, and a message will available to lock the hands free
be displayed. system. Each time the vehicle is
turned on, a password would be
4. Press and release the Talk button. required to use this system. Would
After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or you like this security option turned
‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFT system on?’’
response is ‘‘A ring tone will be
used.’’ or ‘‘An incoming call 6. Press and release the Talk button.
prompt will be used.’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the
HFT system response is, ‘‘Security
will not be used. The system setup
is complete.’’

314 Features
06/09/13 17:35:31 32SWA600_320

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

Setting Your Password 5. Press and release the Talk button. 2. Press and release the Talk button.
The HFT system will accept a After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The After the beep, say your four-digit
numeric, four-digit password that HFT system response is ‘‘The password. For example, say ‘‘1, 2,
you can use for security purposes. system is now locked. Each time 3, 4.’’
the vehicle is turned on, the
To set your password, do this: password will be required to use 3. If the password is correct, the
1. Follow the system setup the system. The system setup is HFT system response is ‘‘Main
procedure from the step 1 through complete. Returning to the main menu.’’
the step 5 as described previously. menu.’’
If the password is not correct, the
2. Press and release the Talk button. To enter your password, do this: HFT system response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4 is
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ Once a password is set, you can lock incorrect. Please try again.’’ Go back
the HFT system so it only operates to the step 2.
3. The HFT system response is after the password is entered.
‘‘What is the four digit number If you forget your password and you
you would like to set as your 1. The HFT system will prompt you cannot activate the HFT system,
password?’’ for your password each time the consult your dealer to cancel the
ignition switch is turned to the ON password.
4. Press and release the Talk button. (II) position and you press the
After the beep, say the four-digit Talk button. You will only be
password you want to use. For asked for the password once per
example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFT ignition cycle. If the password is
system response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is set, its response is ‘‘The system is
this correct?’’ locked. What is the four-digit
password?’’

Features 315
06/09/13 17:35:39 32SWA600_321

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

Pairing Your Phone NOTE: 1. With your phone on and the


Your Bluetooth compatible phone HFT system does not allow you to ignition switch in the
with HandsFree Profile must be pair your phone if the vehicle is ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
paired to the HFT system before you moving. position, press and release the
can make and receive hands-free Talk button. After the beep, say
calls. For pairing, your phone must be in ‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFT system
its Discovery mode. response is ‘‘Phone set up options
are status, pair, edit, delete, and
Up to six phones can be paired to list.’’
the HFT system.
2. Press and release the Talk button.
The following procedure works for After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The
most phones. If you cannot pair HFT system response is ‘‘The
your phone to the HFT system pairing process requires operation
with this procedure, refer to your of your mobile phone. For safety,
phone’s operating manual, or talk only perform this function while
to your phone retailer. the vehicle is stopped. State a four-
digit code for pairing. Note this
During the pairing process, turn code. It will be requested by the
off any previously paired phones phone.’’
before pairing a new phone.

316 Features
06/09/13 17:35:47 32SWA600_322

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

3. Press and release the Talk button. 5. Follow the prompts on your phone 8. If you want to pair another phone,
After the beep, say the four-digit to get it into its Search mode. The repeat steps 1 through 7.
code you want to use. For example, phone will search for the HFT
say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFT system system. When it comes up, select
response is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this Hands-Free Telephone System
correct?’’ from the list of options displayed
on your phone.
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The 6. When asked by the phone, enter
HFT system response is the four-digit code from step 3 into
‘‘Searching for a Bluetooth phone. your phone. The HFT system
Make sure the phone you are response is ‘‘A new phone has
trying to pair is in discovery mode.’’ been found. What would you like
to name this phone?’’
NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a
common way to get your phone into 7. Press and release the Talk button.
its Discovery mode. If these steps do After the beep, say the name you
not work on your phone, refer to the want to use. For example, say
phone’s operating manual. ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFT system
response is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been
successfully paired. Returning to
the main menu.’’

CONTINUED

Features 317
06/09/13 17:35:56 32SWA600_323

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

To rename a paired phone, do this: 4. Press and release the Talk button. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the new name After the beep, say the name of
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ of the phone. For example, say the phone you want to delete. For
The HFT system response is ‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFT system example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The
‘‘Phone setup options are status, response is, ‘‘The name has been HFT system response is ‘‘Would
pair, edit, delete, and list.’’ changed. Returning to the main you like to delete Eric’s phone?’’
menu.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button. 4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The To delete a paired phone, do this: After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFT system response is ‘‘Which 1. Press and release the Talk button. HFT system response is
phone would you like to edit?’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ ‘‘Preparing to delete Eric’s phone.’’
The HFT system response is, Say ‘‘OK’’ to continue. Otherwise,
3. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘Phone setup options are status, say ‘‘Go back,’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
After the beep, say the name of pair, edit, delete, and list.’’
the phone you want to rename. 5. Press and release the Talk button.
For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ 2. Press and release the Talk button. If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the
The HFT system response is After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The HFT system response is ‘‘The
‘‘What is the new name for Eric’s HFT system response is, ‘‘Which phone has been deleted. Returning
phone?’’ phone would you like to delete?’’ to the main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go
back,’’ or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will
not be deleted.

318 Features
06/09/13 17:36:04 32SWA600_324

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone being To change from the currently linked
1. Press and release the Talk button. used, do this: phone to another paired phone, do this:
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ 1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
The HFT system response is After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
‘‘Phone setup options are status, The HFT system response is The HFT system response is
pair, edit, delete, and list.’’ ‘‘Phone setup options are status, ‘‘Searching for the next phone.’’
pair, edit, delete, and list.’’ The HFT system then disconnects
2. Press and release the Talk button. the linked phone and searches for
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button. another paired phone. If no other
HFT system responds by listing After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An phones are found, the first phone
the name of each paired phone. example of the HFT system remains linked.
When all phones paired to the response is, ‘‘Eric’s phone is linked.
system have been read, the HFT Battery strength is three bars.
system response is ‘‘The entire list Signal strength is five bars, and
has been read. Returning to the the phone is roaming. Returning to
main menu.’’ the main menu.’’

Some phones do not send the


status information to the HFT
system.

Features 319
06/09/13 17:36:13 32SWA600_325

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

Making a Call 2. Press and release the Talk button. To make a call using a name in the HFT
You can make calls using any phone After the beep, say the number system phonebook, do this:
number, or by using a name in the you want to call. For example, say 1. With your phone on and the
HFT system phonebook. You can ‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFT system ignition switch in the
also redial the last number called. response is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
During a call, the HFT system allows dial, or continue to add numbers.’’ position, press and release the
you to talk up to 30 minutes after you Talk button. After the beep, say
remove the key from the ignition 3. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFT system
switch. After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ response is, ‘‘What name or
The HFT system response is number would you like to call/
To make a call using a phone number, ‘‘Calling’’ or ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once dial?’’
do this: connected, you will hear the
1. With your phone on and the person you called through the 2. Press and release the Talk button.
ignition switch in the audio speakers. To change the After the beep, say the name you
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) volume, use the audio system want to call. For example, say
position, press and release the volume knob. ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT system response
Talk button. After the beep, say is ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFT system 4. To end the call, press the Back
response is, ‘‘What name or button. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
number would you like to call/ After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
dial?’’ HFT system response is ‘‘Calling’’
or ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob.

320 Features
06/09/13 17:36:23 32SWA600_326

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

4. To end the call, press the Back Sending Numbers or Names 3. Press and release the Talk button.
button. During a Call After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
The HFT system allow you to send dial tones will be sent, and the call
To redial the last number called by numbers or names during a call. This will continue.
the phone, press and release the is useful when you call a menu-
Talk button. After the beep, say driven phone system. You can also To send a name during a call, do this:
‘‘Redial.’’ The HFT system response program account numbers into the 1. Press and release the Talk button.
is, ‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you HFT system phonebook for easy After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
will hear the person you called retrieval during menu-driven calls. HFT system response is, ‘‘What
through the audio speakers. To name or number would you like to
change the volume, use the audio To send a number during a call, do this: send?’’
system volume knob. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button.
HFT system response is, ‘‘What After the beep, say the name you
name or number would you like to want to send. For example, say
send?’’ ‘‘Account number.’’ The HFT
system response is ‘‘Would you
2. Press and release the Talk button. like to send account number?’’
After the beep, say the number
you want to send. For example, 3. Press and release the Talk button.
say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFT system After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
response is ‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or dial tones will be sent, and the call
continue to add numbers.’’ will continue.

Features 321
06/09/13 17:36:31 32SWA600_327

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call


If you receive a call when you are not During a call, you can transfer it
on the phone, the HFT system from the HFT system to your phone,
interrupts the audio system (if it is or from your phone to the HFT
on), and plays the incoming call system.
notification, if activated. To answer
the call, press the Talk button and To transfer a call from the HFT system
begin speaking. If you don’t want to to your phone, do this:
answer the call, press the Back 1. Press and release the Talk button.
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’
The audio switches from the HFT
If your phone has Call Waiting, and system to the phone.
you receive a call when you are on
the phone, press and release the To transfer a call from your phone to the
Talk button to answer it. When you HFT system, do this:
do this, the original call is placed on 2. Press and release the Talk button.
hold. To return to the original call, After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’
press the Talk button again. If you The audio switches from your
don’t want to answer the new call, phone to the HFT system.
disregard it, and continue with your
original call. If you want to hang up
the original call and answer the new
call, press the Back button.

322 Features
06/09/13 17:36:42 32SWA600_328

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook To add a name, do this:


During a call, you can mute or The HFT system phonebook can 1. Press and release the Talk button.
unmute your voice to the person you store up to 50 names with their After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
are talking to. associated numbers. These can be The HFT system response is
any types of numbers. For example, ‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit,
To mute your voice, do this: you can store a phone number and delete, and list.’’
1. Press and release the Talk button. use it to make a call, or you can store
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The a name tag and use it to call. 2. Press and release the Talk button.
HFT system response is, ‘‘Mute is After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The
active.’’ HFT system response is, ‘‘What
name would you like to store?’’
To unmute your voice, do this:
2. Press and release the Talk button. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The After the beep, say the name you
HFT system response is, ‘‘Mute is would like to store. For example,
cancelled.’’ say ‘‘Eric’’. The HFT system
response is ‘‘What is the number
for Eric?’’

4. Press and release the Talk button.


After the beep, say the number.
For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
The HFT system response is ‘‘123
456 7891.’’

CONTINUED

Features 323
06/09/13 17:36:52 32SWA600_329

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

5. Press and release the Talk button. 4. Press and release the Talk button. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The After the beep, say the new After the beep, say the name you
HFT system response is ‘‘Eric has number for Eric. For example, say would like to delete. For example,
been stored. Returning to the main ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFT system say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT system
menu.’’ response is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ response is ‘‘Would you like to
delete Eric?’’
To edit the number of a name, do this: 5. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The 4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ HFT system response is ‘‘The After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
The HFT system response is number has been changed. HFT system response is, ‘‘The
‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit, Returning to the main menu.’’ name has been deleted. Returning
delete, and list.’’ to the main menu.’’
To delete a name, do this:
2. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. To list all names in the phonebook, do
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ this:
HFT system response is, ‘‘What The HFT system response is, 1. Press and release the Talk button.
name would you like to edit?’’ ‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit, After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
delete, and list.’’ The HFT system response is,
3. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘The Phonebook options are store,
After the beep, say the name you 2. Press and release the Talk button. edit, delete, and list.’’
would like to edit. For example, After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT system HFT system response is, ‘‘What
response is ‘‘What is the new name would you like to delete?’’
number for Eric?’’

324 Features
06/09/13 17:44:22 32SWA600_330

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

2. Press and release the Talk button. To call a name from the phonebook list, Clearing the System
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The do this: This operation clears the HFT
HFT system responds by listing 1. Press and release the Talk button. system of your password, your
the names in the phonebook. After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ paired phones, and all names in the
When the end of the list is The HFT system response is HFT system phonebook. Clearing is
reached, the HFT system ‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit, recommended before you sell your
response is, ‘‘The entire list has delete, and list.’’ vehicle.
been read. Returning to the main
menu.’’ 2. Press and release the Talk button. To clear the system, do this:
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The 1. Press and release the Talk button.
HFT system responds by listing After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
the names in the phonebook. HFT system response is, ‘‘System
When it says the name you want to options are setup and clear.’’
call, for example, Eric, press the
Talk button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ 2. Press and release the Talk button.
The HFT system response is, After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’ HFT system response is, ‘‘This
process will clear all paired phones,
3. Press and release the Talk button. clear all entries in the phonebook,
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The and clear the password and
HFT system response is ‘‘Calling.’’ restore the defaults in the system
Once connected, you will hear the setup. Is this what you would like
person you called through the to do?’’
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob. CONTINUED

Features 325
06/09/13 17:44:31 32SWA600_331

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

3. Press and release the Talk button. Changing Language 3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The To select any of the five languages; After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ in the
HFT system response is English, French, Italian, German, and selected language (in French in
‘‘Preparing to clear all paired Spanish, do this: this example). If there are no
phones, all phonebook entries, and paired phones without French
the password, and restore the For example, change from English to name tags, the HFT system
defaults in the system setup. This French. response in the selected language
may take up to 2 minutes to is ‘‘The language has been
complete.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, 1. Press and release the Talk button. changed,’’ then ‘‘Returning to the
otherwise say ‘‘Go back’’ or After the beep, say ‘‘Change main menu.’’ After this response,
‘‘Cancel.’’ language.’’ The HFT system the system recognizes your
response is English, French, commands in the selected
4. If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a short Italian, German, or Spanish? language only.
period of time, the HFT system
response is, ‘‘System has been 2. Press and release the Talk button. If there are paired phones without
cleared. Returning to the main After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ The French name tags, the HFT
menu.’’ HFT system response in the new system response in the selected
selecting language is ‘‘You have language is ‘‘For the system to
selected French. Name tags that identify phones that were paired
were stored while in another while in another language, the
language will not be accessible in phone names need to be re-
French mode. Would you like to recorded.’’
continue?’’, then the system
repeats the response in the NOTE: If there are paired phones
currently selected language. without French name tags, the
following prompts will continue.

326 Features
06/09/13 17:44:39 32SWA600_332

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

4. The HFT system response in the To change from French to English, do 3. Press and release the Talk button.
selected language is, for example, this: After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ in the
‘‘What is the French name for selected language. If there are no
<Paul’s phone>?’’ Press and 1. Press and release the Talk button. paired phones without English
release the Talk button. After the After the beep, say ‘‘Change name tags, the HFT system
beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone’’ in the language’’ in the currently selected response is ‘‘The language has
selected language. The HFT language. The HFT system been changed. Returning to the
system response is, ‘‘What is the response in the currently selected main menu.’’ in the selected
French name for <Pat’s language is, ‘‘English, French, language.
phone>?’’ Press and release the German, Italian, or Spanish?’’
Talk button. Say ‘‘Pat’s phone.’’ If there are paired phones without
After all paired phones missing a 2. Press and release the Talk button. English name tags, the HFT system
French name tag are re-recorded, After the beep, say ‘‘English’’ in response is ‘‘The language has been
the HFT system will prompt in the the currently selected language. changed. For the system to identify
selected language, ‘‘Returning to The HFT system response in the phones that were paired while in
the main menu.’’ new selecting language is, ‘‘You another language, the phone names
have selected English. Name tags need to be re-recorded.’’
that were stored while in French
mode will not be accessible in NOTE: If there are paired phones
English mode. Would you like to without English name tags, the
continue?’’, then the system following prompts will continue.
repeats the response in the
currently selected language.

CONTINUED

Features 327
06/09/13 17:44:46 32SWA600_333

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

4. The HFT system says, for Quick Language Selection


example, ‘‘What is the English To select a language quickly, do the
name for <Paul’s phone>?’’ Press following.
and release the Talk button. After For example, change from English to
the beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone’’ in the French.
selected language. The HFT 1. Press and release the Talk button.
system response is ‘‘What is the After the beep, say ‘‘French’’ in
English name for <Pat’s the selecting language. In this case,
phone>?’’ Press and release the say in French.
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Pat’s phone.’’ After all paired 2. The HFT system response in the
phones missing an English name new selecting language is ‘‘You
tag are re-recorded, the HFT have selected French. Name tags
system will say ‘‘Returning to the that were stored while in another
main menu.’’ language will not be accessible in
French mode. Would you like to
continue?’’ The system also
repeats the response in the
currently selected language.

3. If you want to continue, follow


steps 3 and 4 in page 326 .

328 Features
06/09/19 17:13:35 32SWA600_334

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

HFT System Limitations For information of DoC (Declaration of


When using voice control, the HFT Conformance)
system call is placed on hold, or the
HFT system stops its voice EU models
recognition. The HFT system call Hereby, Johnson Controls Automotive,
will continue when voice control declares that this Hands-Free
command is ended. To operate the Telephone System is in compliance
HFT system again, press the Talk with the essential requirements and
button. Then after the beep, say the other relevant provisions of Directive
appropriate command. 1999/5/EC.

In addition, you cannot use the HFT www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/EU_


system while receiving a PTY alarm. DoC.pdf

Except EU models
For additional conformance
information: www.jciblueconnect.
com/faq

Features 329
06/09/13 17:44:57 32SWA600_335

330
06/09/13 17:45:01 32SWA600_336

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 332


vehicle, you should know what fuel Fuel Recommendation .................. 332
to use and how to check the levels of Petrol models ............................. 332
important fluids. You also need to Diesel models ............................. 332
know how to properly store luggage Service Station Procedures .......... 333
or packages. The information in this Refueling..................................... 333
section will help you. If you plan to Opening and Closing
add any accessories to your vehicle, the Bonnet .............................. 335
please read the information in this Oil Check .................................... 336
section first. Engine Coolant Check .............. 338
Fuel Cutoff System........................ 339
Fuel Economy ................................ 340
Accessories and Modifications .... 341
Carrying Luggage .......................... 343

Before Driving 331


06/09/13 17:45:12 32SWA600_337

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Diesel models


Help assure your vehicle’s future Petrol models Your vehicle is designed to use only
reliability and performance by paying Your vehicle is designed to operate Diesel Fuel (also known as
extra attention to how you drive on Premium/Super unleaded petrol Automotive gas oil and Derv).
during the first 1,000 km (625 miles). with a Research Octane Number
During this period: (RON) of 95 or higher. Your vehicle is not designed to use
RME (Rapeseed Methyl Ester). For
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid Petrol of the recommended more information, ask your dealer.
acceleration. Research Octane Number (RON)
may not be available in some areas. The quality of diesel fuel (Derv) can
Avoid hard braking for the first In this case, petrol of a lower octane vary in different countries, and only
300 km (200 miles). may be used temporarily if it does clean and good quality fuel should be
not cause engine ‘‘knocking.’’ This used.
Do not change the oil until the will result in decreased engine
scheduled maintenance time. performance.

Do not tow a trailer. Using petrol containing lead will


damage your vehicle’s emissions con-
You should also follow these trols and engine. This contributes to
recommendations with an air pollution.
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.

332 Before Driving


06/09/13 17:45:21 32SWA600_338

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures

You need to use the proper fuel for Refueling


EN590 and also vary the fuel
depending on the season. FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE Fuel is highly flammable and
Select the proper fuel according to explosive. You can be burned
the regional or climate condition. or seriously injured when
Use of inadequate fuel may reduce handling fuel.
engine power. In this case, on
vehicles with information display, Stop the engine, and keep
the PGM-FI indicator may come on. heat, sparks, and flame
On vehicles with multi-information away.
display, the symbol ‘‘PGM-FI’’ may Handle fuel only outdoors.
appear on the display. Wipe up spills immediately.

For proper fuel selection, ‘‘DIESEL’’


is marked on the fuel fill cap. 1. Park with the left side closest to
the service station pump.

2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling


Serious damage may occur if petrol on the handle located under the
is used in diesel engines. lower corner of the dashboard.

CONTINUED

Before Driving 333


06/09/13 17:45:29 32SWA600_339

Service Station Procedures

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel


nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on


until it clicks at least once.

6. Push the fuel fill door closed until


TETHER TETHER it latches.

Diesel models HOLDER

3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder
You may hear a hissing sound as on the fuel fill door. To prevent
pressure inside the tank escapes. the fuel fill cap from becoming lost,
it is attached to the fuel filler with
a tether.

334 Before Driving


06/09/13 17:45:37 32SWA600_340

Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Bonnet


BONNET RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
GRIP SUPPORT ROD

CLIP

1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers between the front 3. Holding the grip, pull the support
parking brake. Pull the bonnet edge of the bonnet and the front rod out of its clip. Insert the end
release handle under the lower grille. The bonnet latch handle is into the designated hole pointed
corner of the dashboard. The above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this by an arrow in the bonnet.
bonnet will pop up slightly. handle up to release the bonnet.
Lift the bonnet.

If the bonnet latch handle moves


stiffly, or if you can open the
bonnet without lifting the handle,
the mechanism should be cleaned
and lubricated. CONTINUED

Before Driving 335


06/09/13 17:45:45 32SWA600_341

Service Station Procedures

To close the bonnet, lift it up slightly Oil Check Petrol models


to remove the support rod from the All engines consume oil as part of DIPSTICK
hole. Put the support rod back into their normal operation, therefore,
its holding clip. Lower the bonnet to the engine oil level must be checked
about 30 cm (a foot) above the regularly, for example when
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it refuelling. Always check the oil
is securely latched. before a long journey.

The amount of oil consumed


depends on how the vehicle is driven
On Diesel models and the climatic and road conditions
Do not press the engine cover encountered. The rate of oil
forcibly. This may damage the consumption can be up to 1 litre per
engine cover and component parts. 1,000 km/625 miles. Consumption is 1. Remove the dipstick (orange
likely to be higher when the engine handle).
is new.

Make sure the engine is warmed up


and the vehicle is parked on level
ground. Turn off the engine and wait
approximately 3 minutes before
checking the oil level.

336 Before Driving


06/09/13 17:45:53 32SWA600_342

Service Station Procedures

Diesel models Petrol models Diesel models


DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK UPPER MARK


LOWER MARK LOWER MARK

Remove the dipstick carefully, so 4. Remove the dipstick again, and If it is near or below the lower mark,
you do not spill the oil. Spilled oil check the level. It should be see Adding Engine Oil on page
could damage components in the between the upper and lower 410 on petrol models, 412 on diesel
engine compartment. marks. models.

2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean


cloth or paper towel.

3. Insert it all the way back in its tube.

Before Driving 337


06/09/13 17:46:01 32SWA600_343

Service Station Procedures

Engine Coolant Check Refer to Owner’s Maintenance


Checks on page 400 for information
Petrol models RESERVE TANK Diesel models EXPANSION TANK about checking other items on your
vehicle.

MAX LINE

MAX MIN MIN LINE

On petrol models On Diesel models


Look at the coolant level in the The coolant level in the expansion
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is tank should be checked only when
between the MAX and MIN lines. If the engine and the cooling system
it is below the MIN line, see Adding are cold. Make sure it is between the
Engine Coolant on page 414 for MAX and MIN lines. If it is below
information on adding the proper the MIN line, see Adding Engine
coolant. Coolant on page 416 .

338 Before Driving


06/09/13 17:46:08 32SWA600_344

Fuel Cutoff Switch

Leaking fuel can ignite or


explode, causing you to be
seriously or fatally injured.

Always check for fuel leaks


before resetting the switch.

COVER
HANDLE

The fuel cutoff switch is behind the In a collision or sudden impact, this
instrument panel. To access the switch automatically cuts off the fuel
switch, turn the handle anticlockwise supply to the engine.
on the lower instrument panel, then
remove the cover while releasing the After the switch has activated, it
tab. Extend your arm to the back of must be reset by pressing the button
the instrument panel from the before the engine can be restarted.
underside.

Before Driving 339


06/09/13 17:46:15 32SWA600_345

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy Drive moderately. Rapid


Always maintain your vehicle acceleration, abrupt cornering,
according to the maintenance and hard braking use more fuel.
schedule. See Owner’s
Maintenance Checks (see page Always drive in the highest gear
400 ). possible.

For example, an underinflated tyre Try to maintain a constant speed.


causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ Every time you slow down and
which uses more fuel. speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use the cruise control (on
The build-up of snow or mud on some types) when appropriate.
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance. Combine several short trips into
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel one.
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion. The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
ventilation when possible.

340 Before Driving


06/09/13 17:46:23 32SWA600_346

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:


some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
modifications or add any accessories, modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
be sure to read the following vehicle’s handling, stability, with proper vehicle operation or
information. and performance, and cause performance.
a crash in which you can be
Accessories hurt or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has genuine Honda not overload electrical circuits
accessories that allow you to Follow all instructions in this (see page 513 ) or interfere with
personalize your vehicle. These owner’s manual regarding proper operation of your vehicle.
accessories have been designed and accessories and
approved for your vehicle. modifications. Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
Although non-Honda accessories contact your dealer for assistance.
may fit on your vehicle, they may not When properly installed, cellular If possible, have your dealer
meet factory specifications, and phones, alarms, two-way radios, and inspect the final installation.
could adversely affect your vehicle’s low-powered audio systems should
handling and stability. not interfere with your vehicle’s Do not install accessories on the
computer controlled systems, such side pillars or across the rear
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes. windows as these may interfere
with proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.

Before Driving 341


06/09/21 14:31:06 32SWA600_347

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tyres


Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
or replacing components with your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
non-Honda components could other systems.
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
Some examples are: safety features can make the
Lowering your vehicle with a systems ineffective.
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with an


aftermarket suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because they


are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.

342 Before Driving


06/09/13 17:46:41 32SWA600_348

Carrying Luggage

Your vehicle has several convenient


storage areas:
LUGGAGE AREA DOOR POCKETS UPPER Upper glove box
GLOVE BOX Lower glove box
(P.216)
Door and seat-back pockets
Luggage area, including the rear
seats when folded up or down.
Console compartment
Centre pockets
Upper and lower luggage areas
with the dual deck luggage shelf
(if equipped)
Roof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much luggage,


or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tyres, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of luggage, be sure to read the
DUAL DECK LUGGAGE SEAT-BACK CENTRE POCKETS LOWER following pages.
SHELF* (P.205) POCKETS GLOVE BOX
(P.216)
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
(P.219)
*: If equipped

Before Driving 343


06/09/13 17:46:48 32SWA600_349

Carrying Luggage

Load Limits Carrying Items in the Passenger


When you load luggage, the total Compartment
weight of the vehicle, all passengers, Overloading or improper Store or secure all items that could
luggage and towbar must not exceed loading can affect handling be thrown around and hurt
the maximum permissible weight. and stability and cause a someone during a crash.
The load for the front and rear axles crash in which you can be
also must not exceed the maximum hurt or killed. Be sure items placed on the floor
permissible axle weight. behind the front seats cannot roll
Refer to page 527 for the maximum Follow all load limits and under the seats and interfere with
permissible weight and maximum other loading guidelines in the driver’s ability to operate the
permissible axle weight. this manual. pedals, and proper operation of the
seats. Do not stack items higher
than the back of the front seats.

Keep the lower glove box closed


while driving. If it is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.

344 Before Driving


06/09/13 17:46:58 32SWA600_350

Carrying Luggage

If you fold the rear seats up or Carrying Luggage in the Luggage If you can carry any items on a
down, tie down items that could be Area or on a Roof Rack roof rack, be sure the total weight
thrown about the vehicle during a Distribute luggage evenly on the of the rack and the items does not
crash or sudden stop. Also, keep floor of the luggage area, placing exceed the maximum allowable
all luggage below the bottom of the heaviest items on the bottom weight. Please contact your dealer
the windows. If it is higher, it and as far forward as possible. for further information.
could interfere with the proper Try to secure the items with rope
operation of the side curtain or cord so they will not shift while If you use an accessory roof rack,
airbags. you are driving. the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
Try to secure the items with rope Do not place items on the tonneau came with your roof rack.
or cord so they will not shift while cover (if equipped), or stack
you are driving. Do not stack objects higher than the top of the Concerning means of lashing and
items higher than the back of the back seat. They could block your retaining devices offered on the
front seats. view and be thrown about the accessory market, please contact
vehicle during a crash or sudden your dealer.
Refer to page 195 for folding rear stop.
seats.
If you carry large items that
If equipped prevent you from closing the
Do not use the dual deck luggage tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
shelf with any rear seat folded up passenger area. To avoid the
or down. possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 72 .

Before Driving 345


06/09/13 17:47:07 32SWA600_351

Carrying Luggage

Carrying Luggage on the Dual Luggage Hooks


Deck Luggage Shelf
HOOK

On vehicles with dual deck luggage


shelf
Do not put any items on the dual
deck luggage shelf that could block
your view or be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
To secure luggage, use the four floor On some types
Do not use the dual deck luggage hooks in the luggage area. Make Your vehicle also has luggage hooks
shelf if the rear seats are folded sure all stored items are secured on side panel in the luggage area.
down. before driving. They are designed to hold light
items. Heavy objects may damage
Do not exceed the dual deck luggage the hook. Make sure any items put
shelf load limit of 10 kg. on each hook weigh less than 3 kg
(6.5 lbs).

346 Before Driving


06/09/13 17:47:11 32SWA600_352

Carrying Luggage

Optional Separation Net


The separation net can be used to
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the luggage area. Heavy
items should be properly secured on
the floor of the luggage area. The
net may not prevent heavy items
from being thrown forward in a
crash or a sudden stop.

Before Driving 347


06/09/13 17:47:13 32SWA600_353

348
06/09/13 17:47:17 32SWA600_354

Driving

This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ......................... 350


starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ......................... 351
conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine
automatic and manual transmissions. (Petrol models) .......................... 352
It also includes important Starting the Engine
information on parking your vehicle, (Diesel models).......................... 353
the braking system, the vehicle Manual Transmission.................... 354
stability assist (VSA) system, the Automatic Transmission............... 358
collision mitigation brake system Parking ............................................ 364
(CMBS), and facts you need if you Braking System.............................. 365
are planning to tow a trailer. Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 366
Collision Mitigation Brake
System (CMBS) ......................... 368
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System......................................... 378
Driving in Bad Weather ................ 380
Towing a Trailer ............................ 382
Trailer Stability Assist ................... 390
Off-Road Guidelines ...................... 393

Driving 349
06/09/13 17:47:25 32SWA600_355

Driving Guidelines

Your vehicle has higher ground Do not modify your vehicle in any Your vehicle is equipped with a four-
clearance that allows you to travel way that would raise the centre of wheel drive (4WD) system. When
over bumps, obstacles, and rough gravity. the system senses a loss of front-
terrain. It also provides good wheel traction, it automatically
visibility so you can anticipate Do not carry heavy luggage on the transfers some power to the rear
problems earlier. roof. wheels. This gives you better
traction and mobility.
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high centre You still need to exercise the same
of gravity that can cause it to roll care when accelerating, steering, and
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility braking that you would in a two-
vehicles have a significantly higher wheel drive vehicle.
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles. See page 393 for off-road driving
guidelines.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:

Take corners at slower speeds


than you would with a passenger
vehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abrupt


manoeuvres whenever possible.

350 Driving
06/09/13 17:47:36 32SWA600_356

Preparing to Drive

You should do the following checks 6. Check the seat adjustment (see
and adjustments before you drive pages 188 and 189 ).
your vehicle.
7. Check the adjustment of the
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see
and outside lights are clean and page 212 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 8. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 174 ).
2. Check that the bonnet is fully
closed. 9. Make sure the doors are securely
closed.
3. Check that the tailgate is fully
closed. 10. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
4. Visually check the tyres. If a tyre their seat belts (see page 19 ).
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure. 11. When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
5. Check that any items you may be instrument panel (see page 78 ).
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely. On vehicles with multi-information
display
Check the symbol(s) on the multi-
information display.

Driving 351
06/09/13 17:47:46 32SWA600_357

Starting the Engine (Petrol models)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. In cold weather, turn off all The immobilizer system protects The engine is harder to start in cold
electrical accessories to reduce your vehicle from theft. If an weather. Also, the thinner air found
the drain on the battery. improperly-coded key (or other at altitudes above 2,400 meters
device) is used, the engine’s fuel (8,000 feet) adds to this problem.
3. Manual transmission: system is disabled. See Immobilizer
Push the clutch pedal down all the System on page 176 . If the outside temperature is below
way and shift the transmission to freezing, or if your vehicle has not
neutral. 5. If the engine does not start within been driven for several days, warm
15 seconds, or starts but stalls up the engine for a few minutes
Automatic transmission: right away, repeat step 5 with the before driving (prohibited in
Make sure the shift lever is in accelerator pedal pressed halfway Germany! §30 StVO).
Park. Press on the brake pedal. down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
4. Without touching the accelerator so the engine does not race.
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold 6. If the engine fails to start, press
the key in the START (III) the accelerator pedal all the way
position for more than 15 seconds down, and hold it there while
at a time. If the engine does not starting to clear flooding. If the
start right away, pause for at least engine still does not start, return
10 seconds before trying again. to step 5.

352 Driving
06/09/13 17:47:56 32SWA600_358

Starting the Engine (Diesel models)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off all electrical accessories The immobilizer system protects The engine must not be run above
to reduce the drain on the battery. your vehicle from theft. If an fast idle speed until the oil pressure
improperly-coded key (or other warning indicator goes off. This will
3. Push the clutch pedal down all the device) is used, the engine’s fuel ensure that the engine and
way and shift the transmission to system is disabled. See Immobilizer turbocharger bearings are properly
neutral. System on page 176 . lubricated before being run at
normal driving speeds.
4. Turn the ignition key to the ON Cold Climates
(II) position. Wait until the glow In very cold climates the battery Ignition Switching Off
plugs indicator turns off. charging and oil pressure indicators To avoid the possibility of damaging
may take several seconds to go off. the turbocharger bearings through
5. Without touching the accelerator Similarly, engine cranking times will inadequate lubrication, ALWAYS
pedal, turn the ignition key to the also increase. allow the engine to idle for 10
START (III) position, and release seconds before turning off the
the key as soon as the engine is Warming Up engine.
running. If the engine does not In the interests of fuel economy, it is
start right away, do not hold the advisable to start driving straight
key in START (III) for more than away, remembering that harsh
15 seconds at a time (20 seconds acceleration or labouring the engine
in cold weather). Pause for at least before the normal operating
20 seconds before trying again. temperature has been reached can
damage the engine.

Driving 353
06/09/13 17:48:02 32SWA600_359

Manual Transmission

foot on the clutch pedal. This can


cause excessive clutch wear.
Rapid slowing or speeding-
Come to a full stop before you shift up can cause loss of control
into reverse. You can damage the on slippery surfaces. If you
transmission by trying to shift into crash, you can be injured.
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and Use extra care when driving
pause for a few seconds before on slippery surfaces.
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’
The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for When slowing down, you can get
smooth operation. It has a lockout so extra braking from the engine by
you cannot accidentally shift from shifting to a lower gear. This extra
any forward gear to reverse while braking can help you maintain a safe
the vehicle is moving at a certain speed and prevent your brakes from
speed (see page 357 ). overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
When shifting up or down, make make sure the engine speed will not
sure you push the clutch pedal down go into the tachometer’s red zone in
all the way, shift to the next gear, the lower gear. Refer to the
and let the pedal up gradually. When maximum allowable speeds charts.
you are not shifting, do not rest your

354 Driving
06/09/13 17:48:08 32SWA600_360

Manual Transmission

Recommended Shift Points 2.2 engine model (diesel)


Drive in the highest gear that lets
Do not rest your hand on the shift the engine run and accelerate Shift up Normal acceleration
lever while driving; Pressure smoothly. This will give you good
transmitted from your hand may fuel economy and effective 1st to 2nd 15 km/h (9 mph)
cause premature wear to gear emissions control. The following 2nd to 3rd 35 km/h (22 mph)
selector mechanism. shift points are recommended: 3rd to 4th 55 km/h (34 mph)
4th to 5th 70 km/h (43 mph)
2.0 engine model 5th to 6th 85 km/h (53 mph)

Shift up Normal acceleration

1st to 2nd 15 km/h (9 mph)


2nd to 3rd 35 km/h (22 mph)
3rd to 4th 50 km/h (31 mph)
4th to 5th 75 km/h (47 mph)
5th to 6th 100 km/h (62 mph)

Driving 355
06/09/13 17:48:15 32SWA600_361

Manual Transmission

Maximum Allowable Speeds 2.0 engine model 2.2 engine model (diesel)
The speeds in this table are the
maximum allowable speeds in each Gear Maximum allowable Gear Maximum allowable
gear. If you exceed these speeds, the speeds speeds*4
engine speed will enter into the
tachometer’s red zone. If this occurs, 1st 45 km/h (28 mph) 1st 40 km/h (24 mph)
you may feel the engine cut in and 2nd 88 km/h (55 mph) 2nd 77 km/h (48 mph)
out. This is caused by a limiter in the 3rd 136 km/h (85 mph) 3rd 119 km/h (74 mph)
engine’s computer controls. The 4th 170 km/h (106 mph) 4th 161 km/h (100 mph)
engine will run normally when you 5th 190 km/h (118 mph) 5th 202 km/h (125 mph)
reduce the rpm below the red zone.
*4 : The values shown are the speeds when the
Before downshifting, make sure the engine is at 4,500 rpm.
vehicle will not exceed the maximum
allowable speed specified by the
chart for the lower gear to avoid
engine damage.

356 Driving
06/09/13 17:48:22 32SWA600_362

Manual Transmission

Reverse Lockout 2. If you are still unable to shift to


The manual transmission has reverse, apply the parking brake,
lockout so you cannot accidentally and turn the ignition switch to the
shift from any forward gear to ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
reverse while the vehicle is moving position.
at a certain speed. If you cannot shift
to reverse when the vehicle is 3. Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
stopped, do the following. reverse.

4. With the clutch pedal still pressed,


start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure to


1. With the clutch pedal pressed, shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
move the shift lever to the first/ developing a problem. Have it
second gear side of the neutral checked by your dealer.
gate, then shift to reverse.

Driving 357
06/09/13 17:48:30 32SWA600_363

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a Shifting
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lamp


comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
RELEASE
automatic transmission control BUTTON
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by SHIFT LEVER
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument To shift from any position, press
panel show which position the shift On vehicles with multi-information firmly on the brake pedal and press
lever is in. display the release button on the side of the
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a shift lever. You cannot shift out of
possible problem with the Park when the ignition switch is in
transmission, you will see the symbol the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
‘‘ ,’’ or, the symbol with a position.
‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message.

358 Driving
06/09/13 17:48:37 32SWA600_364

Automatic Transmission

To shift from: Do this: Park (P) − This position Reverse (R) − Press the brake
Press the brake pedal and mechanically locks the pedal and press the release button
P to R press the shift lever release transmission. Use Park whenever on the side of the shift lever to
button. you are turning off or starting the shift from Park to reverse. To
R to P engine. To shift out of Park, you shift from reverse to neutral, come
N to R Press the shift lever release must press on the brake pedal and to a complete stop and then shift.
D to 2 button. have your foot off the accelerator Press the release button before
2 to 1 pedal. Press the release button on shifting into reverse from neutral.
1 to 2 the side of the shift lever to move
2 to D it.
D to N Move the shift lever.
N to D If you have done all of the above
R to N and still cannot move the lever out
D3 to D Press the D3 button. of Park, see Shift Lock Release
D to D3 on page 363 .

To avoid transmission damage, come


to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.

CONTINUED

Driving 359
06/09/13 17:48:44 32SWA600_365

Automatic Transmission

Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you D3 Mode


need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.

Drive (D) − Use this position for


your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a D3 SWITCH D3 MODE INDICATOR
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may Press the D3 switch on the side of When the D3 mode is on, the
notice the transmission shifting up at the shift lever to turn this mode on transmission selects only the first
higher engine speeds when the or off; the D3 mode indicator comes three gears. Use D3 mode when
engine is cold. This helps the engine on whenever the D3 mode is towing a trailer, or to provide engine
warm up faster. selected. braking when going down a steep hill.
D3 mode can also keep the
D3 mode can be turned on or off transmission from cycling between
only when the ignition switch is in third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
the ON (II) position and the shift driving.
lever is in the D position.

360 Driving
06/09/13 17:48:54 32SWA600_366

Automatic Transmission

Shifting out from the D position will Second (2) − To shift to second, First (1) − To shift from second to
cancel the D3 mode, and the D3 press the release button on the side first, press the release button on the
indicator will go out. Selecting the D of the shift lever. This position locks side of the shift lever. This position
position again will resume the D3 the transmission in second gear. It locks the transmission in first gear.
mode and the indicator comes on. does not downshift to first gear By upshifting and downshifting
when you come to a stop. through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can
Turning the ignition switch to the operate the transmission much like a
LOCK (0) position turns this mode Use second gear: manual transmission without a
off. When you restart the engine, For more power when climbing. clutch pedal.
select the D position and press the
D3 mode switch again to use this To increase engine braking when If you shift into first position when
mode. going down steep hills. the vehicle speed is above 50 km/h
(31 mph), the transmission shifts
The D3 mode indicator also comes For starting out on a slippery into second gear first to avoid
on for a few seconds when you turn surface or in deep snow. sudden engine braking.
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with a


trailer.

Driving 361
06/09/13 17:48:59 32SWA600_367

Automatic Transmission

Maximum Allowable Speeds


The speeds in this table are the Position Maximum
maximum allowable speeds in each allowable speeds
position. If you exceed these speeds,
the engine speed will enter into the 1 63 km/h (39 mph)
tachometer’s red zone. If this occurs, 2 109 km/h (68 mph)
you will feel the engine cut in and D3 167 km/h (104 mph)
out. This is caused by a limiter in the
engine’s computer controls. The
engine will run normally when you
reduce the rpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure the


vehicle will not exceed the maximum
allowable speed specified by the
chart for the lower gear to avoid
engine damage.

362 Driving
06/09/13 17:49:09 32SWA600_368

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Release COVER RELEASE BUTTON


This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignition


switch.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Using a 4. Insert the key in the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift
small flat-tipped screwdriver or release slot. lock release slot, then reinstall the
metal fingernail file, carefully pry cover. Make sure the notch on the
on the edge of the cover to remove 5. Push down on the key while you cover is on the passenger’s side.
it. press the release button on the Press the brake pedal, and restart
shift lever and move the shift lever the engine.
out of Park to neutral.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.

Driving 363
06/09/13 17:49:19 32SWA600_369

Parking

Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the windows are closed. the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly, or curb. If you have a manual
your vehicle may roll if it is parked Turn off the lights. transmission, put it in first gear.
on an incline.
Place any packages, valuables, etc., If the vehicle is facing downhill,
If your vehicle has an automatic in the boot or take them with you. turn the front wheels toward the
transmission, set the parking brake curb. If you have a manual
before you put the transmission in Lock the doors. transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the On vehicles with security system Make sure the parking brake is
parking mechanism in the Check the indicator on the fully released before driving away.
transmission. instrument panel to verify that the Driving with the parking brake
security system is set. partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.

364 Driving
06/09/13 17:49:29 32SWA600_370

Braking System

Your vehicle is equipped with disc Resting your foot on the pedal keeps Braking System Design
brakes at all four wheels. A power the brakes applied lightly, builds up The hydraulic system that operates
assist helps reduce the effort needed heat, increases wear, and reduces the brakes has two separate circuits.
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock their effectiveness. It also keeps Each circuit works diagonally across
brake system (ABS) helps you retain your brake lights on all the time, the vehicle (the left-front brake is
steering control when braking very confusing drivers behind you. connected with the right-rear brake,
hard. etc.). If one circuit should develop a
Constant application of the brakes problem, you will still have braking
The brake pedal assist function when going down a long hill builds at two wheels.
increases the force you apply to the up heat and reduces their
brake pedal during an emergency effectiveness. Use the engine to Brake Wear Indicators
stop. assist the brakes by taking your foot All four brakes have audible brake
off the accelerator and downshifting wear indicators.
On vehicles with collision mitigation to a lower gear.
brake system If the brake pads need replacing, you
When the brake pedal assist is Check the brakes after driving will hear a distinctive, metallic
activated, the e-pretensioners tighten through deep water. Apply the screeching sound when you apply
the front seat belts (see page 28 ). brakes moderately to see if they feel the brake pedal. If you do not have
normal. If not, apply them gently and the brake pads replaced, they will
frequently until they do. Be extra screech all the time. It is normal for
cautious in your driving. the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.

Driving 365
06/09/13 17:49:37 32SWA600_371

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake ABS Indicator
helps prevent the wheels from pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is If the ABS indicator comes on, the
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly anti-lock function of the braking
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry road, system has shut down. The brakes
person can do it. you will need to press on the brake still work like a conventional system,
pedal very hard before the ABS but without anti-lock. You should
The electronic brake distribution activates. However, you may feel the have your dealer inspect your vehicle
(EBD) system, which is part of the ABS activate immediately if you are as soon as possible.
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear trying to stop on snow or ice.
braking distribution according to If the ABS indicator comes on while
vehicle loading. driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page 512 .
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Let the ABS work for you by always On vehicles with multi-information
keeping firm, steady pressure on the display
brake pedal. This is sometimes You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’ or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display.

366 Driving
06/09/13 17:49:44 32SWA600_372

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
system indicator come on together, ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
and the parking brake is fully distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
released, the EBD system may also vehicle. It only helps with steering snow, than a vehicle without anti-
be shut down. control during braking. lock.

Test your brakes as instructed on ABS will not prevent a skid that
page 512 . If the brakes feel normal, results from changing direction
drive slowly and have your vehicle abruptly, such as trying to take a
repaired by your dealer as soon as corner too fast or making a sudden
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking lane change. Always drive at a safe
which could cause the rear wheels to speed for the road and weather
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of conditions.
control.
ABS cannot prevent the loss of
The VSA indicator will come on stability. Always steer moderately
along with the ABS indicator. when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.

Driving 367
06/09/13 17:49:52 32SWA600_373

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

On vehicle with the Adaptive Cruise The CMBS does not activate if the BRAKE ACTUATOR
Control System speed difference between your
Overview vehicle and the vehicle ahead of
The collision mitigation brake you is less than 15 km/h (10 mph).
system (CMBS) can assist you when CMBS may also not activate if you
there is a possibility of your vehicle turn the steering wheel to avoid
hitting the vehicle in front of you. It the collision.
is designed to reduce the speed of
your vehicle before an unavoidable When the CMBS activates, the brake
collision occurs and, if possible, to lights also come on. SEAT BELT
alert you to a potential collision while e-PRETENSIONER
there is time to prevent it. Here is a RADAR SENSOR
brief description of what the CMBS
can do: The CMBS consists of a radar
sensor in the front grille, a brake
When your speed is above 15 actuator in the engine compartment,
km/h (10 mph), the CMBS radar an indicator on the instrument panel,
sensor in the front grille can sense seat belt e-pretensioners on the front
a vehicle ahead of you. When your seats, and an on/off switch on the
vehicle gets too close to the dashboard.
vehicle ahead of you, the system
may activate a warning beep,
causing automatic application of
the brakes, and causing the
e-pretensioners to tighten the
front seat belts (see page 28 ).

368 Driving
06/09/13 17:50:00 32SWA600_374

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

Radar Sensor
CHECK CMBS RADAR BOLTS
SENSOR SYMBOL (Do not tamper)

EMBLEM

The radar sensor is located behind You will also see the symbol above There are three bolts on the sides of
the emblem in the front grille. If the and the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ or this the radar sensor. Do not tamper with
emblem is covered with mud, dirt, symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ these bolts, or you may cause the
dead leaves, wet snow, etc., or if you message on the multi-information system to malfunction.
put a sticker on it, the CMBS will display.
automatically shut off, and the
CMBS indicator on the instrument Always keep the emblem clean. If it
panel will come on (see page 93 ). gets dirty, clean it with water or a
mild detergent. Never use chemical
solvents or polishing powder.

CONTINUED

Driving 369
06/09/13 17:50:10 32SWA600_375

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

Do not allow anything to impact the The radar sensor may not always (EU models)
radar sensor or the emblem. If either scan as intended. Here are two EC Directives
of these parts receives a strong examples: This radar sensor system complies
impact, turn off the system by with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
pressing the CMBS off switch, and Your vehicle is tilted because of a and Telecommunications Terminal
have your vehicle checked by a heavy load in the rear or from Equipment and the mutual
dealer. If the front grille ever needs modifications to the suspension. recognition of their conformity)
to be repaired, consult a dealer first. Do not overload your vehicle (see Directives.
Carrying Luggage on page 343 ),
If the front emblem or the radar and do not make any modifications
sensor ever needs to be removed, to the suspension (see Accessories
take your vehicle to a dealer. and Modifications on page 341 ).

The tyres are not correctly


maintained. Always make sure the
When the CMBS is on, the radar tyre pressures are correct (see
sensor constantly scans for vehicles page 450 ), and that the tyres are
ahead of you. This means that the correct size and in good
driving on a road with a few or no condition (see Tyres on page 450 ).
vehicles could cause the symbol
‘‘ ’’ to appear on the multi-
information display. This is normal
and not a cause for concern.

370 Driving
06/09/13 17:50:17 32SWA600_376

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

Collision Alarm CMBS OFF Switch

CMBS OFF SWITCH

If the system senses a likely collision The audible alarm is a constant To turn the CMBS off, press and
with a vehicle or object ahead of you, beeping sound; the visual alert is an hold the CMBS off switch under the
it alerts you with an audible and a amber coloured symbol as shown driver’s side vent until you hear a
visual alarm. above or a ‘‘BRAKE’’ message that beep. The CMBS indicator on the
flashes on the multi-information instrument panel comes on to
display. If either of the alarms comes remind you, and a CMBS OFF
on, take the appropriate action to message appears on the multi-
prevent a collision (apply the brakes, information display. To turn the
change lanes, etc.). system back on, press and hold the
switch again until you hear a beep.

CONTINUED

Driving 371
06/09/13 17:50:26 32SWA600_377

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

When you turn the ignition switch to Automatic Shut Off The CMBS will automatically reset
the ON (II) position, the CMBS is Any of the conditions below can when these conditions are improved.
turned on if it was on previously. cause the CMBS to shut off. When
the system shuts off, the CMBS
If you turn it off, by pressing the indicator in the instrument panel
CMBS off switch, the CMBS comes on, and the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or
indicator comes on and stays on to this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
remind you that the CMBS is SYSTEM’’ message appears on the
deactivated. multi-information display for about 5
seconds.

An abnormal tyre condition is


detected (wrong tyre size, flat tyre,
etc.).

Extended off-road or mountainous


driving.

Driving your vehicle with the


parking brake applied.

Driving your vehicle in bad


weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

A dirty emblem on the front grille.

372 Driving
06/09/13 17:50:35 32SWA600_378

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

CMBS Indicator The CMBS indicator normally comes When the VSA system indicator
on under these conditions: comes on (see page 378 ).
CMBS INDICATOR
When you manually turn off the When you turn the ignition switch
system. This condition will be kept to the ON (II) position, the CMBS
until you turn on the CMBS by indicator should come on for a few
pressing the switch. seconds, then go off. If the
indicator comes on at any other
When the system shuts off time and the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or
automatically. this symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
SYSTEM’’ message appears on the
When you drive in bad weather multi-information display, there is
(rain, snow, fog, etc.). a problem with the CMBS. You
can still drive your vehicle, but
This indicator comes on for several If anything covers the front grille CMBS will not be operating. Have
seconds when you turn the ignition (dirt, mud, dry leaves, wet snow, your vehicle checked by a dealer.
switch to the ON (II) position. It also etc.).
comes on and stays on when you
turn the CMBS off by pressing the
CMBS OFF switch.

To turn the CMBS back on, make


sure the vehicle is stopped and the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position, then press the CMBS OFF
switch until you hear a beep.

Driving 373
06/09/13 17:50:45 32SWA600_379

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

Limitations
The CMBS may not activate under YOUR VEHICLE YOUR VEHICLE
some conditions. Here are a few
examples:

The distance between your vehicle


and the vehicle ahead of you is too
short.

A vehicle cuts in front of you at a


slow speed.

A vehicle cuts in front of you and Driving in heavy, stop-and-go


brakes suddenly. traffic.

When you accelerate rapidly and The vehicle ahead of you is a


approach the vehicle ahead of you motorcycle or other small vehicle.
at high speed.

Immediately after you drive off.

374 Driving
06/09/13 17:50:53 32SWA600_380

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

YOUR VEHICLE YOUR VEHICLE


The CMBS is not designed to detect
pedestrians.

Even with little or no chance of a


collision, the CMBS may activate
under these conditions:

When you change lanes quickly,


then overtake the vehicle ahead of
you.

A vehicle suddenly crosses in front When you approach or pass a


of you. vehicle ahead of you that is
turning left or right in an
intersection.

CONTINUED

Driving 375
06/09/13 17:51:01 32SWA600_381

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

YOUR VEHICLE
LOW BRIDGE

RAILS
SIGN, POLE, etc.

When you pass a low bridge at When you approach train tracks at Because of the road condition
high speed. the bottom of a hill and you do not (curved, winding, etc.) or the state of
apply the brakes. your vehicle (turning angle, lane
When you go over a sharp-edged position, etc.), CMBS can sometimes
speed bump at high speed. mistake a stationary object (light
pole, traffic sign, etc.) as a vehicle
When you go over areas of ahead of you and temporarily
construction on the road surface. operate. This is normal.

376 Driving
06/09/13 17:51:05 32SWA600_382

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

Important Safety Reminders


The main purpose of the CMBS is to
reduce the severity of injuries
caused by an unavoidable collision.
While the CMBS may help to alert
you and minimize the severity of a
collision, it may not activate in every
dangerous situation.

Even with the CMBS, it is still your


responsibility to operate the brake
pedal, the clutch pedal and steering
wheel appropriately, according to the
driving conditions.

Driving 377
06/09/13 17:51:14 32SWA600_383

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator If the indicator does not come on
system helps to stabilize the vehicle when the ignition switch is turned to
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the the ON (II) position, there may be a
more or less than desired. It also VSA Activation indicator blink. problem with the VSA system. Have
assists you in maintaining traction your dealer inspect your vehicle as
while accelerating on loose or VSA System Indicator soon as possible.
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and The VSA system indicator (see page When the VSA system indicator
by selectively applying the brakes. 81 ) comes on and stays on when comes on, you will also see the
there is a problem with the VSA symbol ‘‘ ’’ or this symbol with a
When VSA activates, you may notice system. The VSA activation indicator ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the
that the engine does not respond to will also come on. multi-information display.
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also If the VSA system indicator comes Without VSA, your vehicle will have
be some unusual noise from the on while driving, pull to the side of normal braking and cornering ability,
modulator. You will also see the VSA the road when it is safe, and turn off but it will not have VSA traction and
activation indicator blink. the engine. Reset the system by stability enhancement.
restarting the engine. If the VSA
The VSA system cannot enhance the system indicator stays, or comes
vehicle’s driving stability in all back on while driving, have the VSA
situations and does not control your system inspected by your dealer.
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.

378 Driving
06/09/13 17:51:22 32SWA600_384

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Off Switch VSA is on.


VSA OFF SWITCH VSA OFF SWITCH Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.

VSA and Tyre Sizes


Driving with varying tyre or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tyres,
On vehicles with headlight adjuster
dial make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tyres (see
This switch is under the driver’s side turned it off the last time you page 454 ).
vent. To turn the VSA system on and drove the vehicle.
off, press and hold it until you hear a If you install winter tyres, make sure
beep. In certain unusual conditions when they are the same size as those that
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow were originally supplied with your
When VSA is off, the VSA activation mud or fresh snow, it may be easier vehicle. Exercise the same caution
indicator comes on as a reminder. to free it with the VSA temporarily during winter driving as you would if
Press and hold the switch again switched off. When the VSA system your vehicle was not equipped with
turns the system back on. is off, the traction control system is VSA.
also off. You should only attempt to
VSA is turned on every time you free your vehicle with the VSA off if
start the engine, even if you you are not able to free it when the

Driving 379
06/09/13 17:51:28 32SWA600_385

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving Technique − Always drive Exercise extra caution when driving


slower than you would in dry in rain after a long dry spell. After
weather. It takes your vehicle longer months of dry weather, the first
to react, even in conditions that may rains bring oil to the surface of the
seem just barely damp. Apply roadway, making it slippery.
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few kilometers
(miles) of driving while you adjust to
the change in driving conditions.
Rain, fog, and snow conditions re- This is especially true in snow. A
quire a different driving technique person can forget some snow-driving
because of reduced traction and techniques during the summer
visibility. Keep your vehicle well- months. Practice is needed to relearn
maintained and exercise greater those skills.
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control (on
some types) should not be used in
these conditions.

380 Driving
06/09/13 17:51:35 32SWA600_386

Driving in Bad Weather

Visibility − Being able to see Traction − Check your tyres


clearly in all directions and being frequently for wear and proper
visible to other drivers are important pressure. Both are important in
in all weather conditions. This is preventing ‘‘aquaplaning’’ (loss of
more difficult in bad weather. To be traction on a wet surface). In the
seen more clearly during daylight winter, mount snow tyres on all four
hours, turn on your headlights. wheels for the best handling.

Inspect your windscreen wipers and Watch road conditions carefully,


washers frequently. Keep the wind- they can change from moment to
screen washer reservoir full of the moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
proper fluid. Have the windscreen pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
wiper blades replaced if they start to patches of ice. Driving conditions
streak the windscreen or leave parts can be very hazardous when the Be very cautious when passing, or
unwiped. Use the demister and air outside temperature is near freezing. being passed by other vehicles. The
conditioning to keep the windows The road surface can become spray from large vehicles reduces
from fogging up on the inside (see covered with areas of water puddles your visibility, and the wind buffeting
pages 234 and 241 ). mixed with areas of ice, so your can cause you to lose control.
traction can change without warning.
CAUTION: Do not drive on the road
Be careful when downshifting. If where water is deep. Driving through
traction is low, you can lock up the deep water will cause damage to the
drive wheels for a moment and cause engine and electrical equipment and
a skid. the vehicle will break down.

Driving 381
06/09/13 17:51:44 32SWA600_387

Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle has been designed Load Limits


primarily to carry passengers and
their luggage. You can also use it to Exceeding any load limit or
tow a trailer if you carefully observe improperly loading your
the load limits, use the proper vehicle and trailer can cause
equipment, and follow the guidelines a crash in which you can be
in this section. seriously hurt or killed.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Check the loading of your


trailer stability assist to help stabilize vehicle and trailer carefully
the vehicle/trailer combination by before starting to drive.
reducing the vehicle speed. For
more information, see page 390 .

Break-In Period The total weight of the trailer and


Avoid towing a trailer during your towbar (with/without brakes) plus
vehicle’s first 1,000 km (625 miles) its luggage must not exceed the
(see page 332 ). maximum towing weight. See page
527 .
Be sure to read the Off-Road
Guidelines section on page 393 if you
plan to tow off paved surfaces.

382 Driving
06/09/13 17:51:53 32SWA600_388

Towing a Trailer

For example, if the trailer and its The maximum towing weight
load weigh 225 kg (500 lbs), the must not exceed the specified limit
trailer nose load should be 22.5 kg as shown on page 527 .
(50 lbs). Adjust trailer’s luggage to
change the trailer nose load. Start This weight will be estimated on
by putting approximately normal driving below 1,000 meters
60 percent of the luggage toward elevation.
the front and 40 percent toward
the rear. With a trailer package of If you tow a trailer in mountainous
more than 1,000 kg (2,200 lbs), conditions, remember to reduce 10
you may need to adjust the % of the combined vehicle and
luggage weight toward the rear. trailer weights from the maximum
Never load the trailer so the back towing weight for every 1,000
is heavier than the front. This meters of elevation.
The trailer nose load should never takes weight off your vehicle’s
exceed 100 kg (220 lbs). This is rear axle and reduces traction. The combined vehicle and trailer
the amount of weight the trailer weights are the maximum
puts on the towbar when it is fully- The maximum permissible weight permissible weight and trailer
loaded. As a rule of thumb for must not exceed the specified limit weight with everything in and on
trailer weights of less than 1,000 as shown on page 526 . the trailer.
kg (2,200 lbs), the trailer nose load
should be 10 percent of the total The maximum permissible weight
trailer package. is total weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage and
towbar.
CONTINUED

Driving 383
06/09/13 17:52:03 32SWA600_389

Towing a Trailer

Please consider that the Towing Equipment and Towbars


installation of optionals (and trailer Accessories Any towbar used on your vehicle
nose load when towing a trailer) Towing can require a variety of must be properly bolted to the
will reduce the loading capacity. equipment, depending on the size of underbody.
your trailer, how it will be used, how
Towing a load that is too heavy can much load you are towing, and Refer to page 526 for the towbar
seriously affect your vehicle’s where you tow. mounting points.
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and Discuss your needs with your trailer Safety Chains
drivetrain. sales or rental agency, and follow the Always use safety chains when you
guidelines in this section. Also make tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
Checking Loads sure that all equipment is properly are secured to the trailer and towbar,
The best way to confirm that vehicle installed and maintained, and that it and that they cross under the trailer
and trailer weights are within limits meets the country’s regulations nose and can catch the trailer if it
is to have them checked at a public where you are driving. becomes unhitched. Leave enough
scale. slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
Using a suitable scale or a special chains drag on the ground.
trailer nose load gauge, check the
total weight, the weight at each axle
and the trailer nose load the first
time you set up a towing combination
(a fully-loaded vehicle and trailer),
then recheck the loads whenever the
conditions change.

384 Driving
06/09/29 16:58:53 32SWA600_390

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights If you use a non-Honda trailer


If you are thinking of getting a trailer Trailer lights and equipment must lighting harness and converter, you
that has brakes, be sure they are comply with the country’s can get the connector and pins that
electronically actuated. Do not regulations where you are driving. mate with the connector in your
attempt to tap into your vehicle’s Check the requirements for the vehicle from your dealer.
hydraulic system. No matter how areas where you plan to tow, and use
successful it may seem, any attempt only equipment designed for your You can get an optional trailer
to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle. lighting connector for your vehicle
vehicle’s hydraulic system will lower from your dealer.
braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard. Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
See your trailer dealer or rental have a qualified technician install a
agency for more information on suitable connector between the
installing electric brakes. vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system.
TRAILER HAZARD
(WHITE) (PINK) Always consult your dealer before
connecting the trailer lights to your
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting vehicle’s lighting system.
connector located behind the left
side panel in the luggage area. Refer
to the drawing above for the wiring
colour code and purpose of each pin. CONTINUED

Driving 385
06/09/13 17:52:24 32SWA600_391

Towing a Trailer

Additional Trailer Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist The lights and brakes on your
There may be laws requiring special When preparing to tow, and before vehicle and the trailer are working
outside mirrors when towing a trailer. driving away, be sure to check the properly.
Check the local laws in the country. following:
Even if there are no legal Your vehicle tyres and spare (if
requirements, you should install The vehicle has been properly equipped) are properly inflated,
special mirrors if you cannot clearly serviced, and suspension and and the trailer tyres and spare are
see behind you, or if the trailer cooling system are in good inflated as recommended by the
creates a blind spot. operating condition. trailer maker.

Ask your trailer sales or rental The trailer has been properly Be sure to check regulations
agency if any other items are serviced and is in good condition. concerning the maximum speed or
recommended or required for your driving restrictions for vehicles
towing situation. All weights and loads are within towing trailers. If you are driving
limits. across several countries, check
each country’s requirements
The towbar, safety chains, and any before leaving home, because
other attachments are secure. regulations may vary.

All items in or on the trailer are Operating speed when towing a


properly secured and cannot shift trailer is restricted to 100 km/h
while you drive. (62 mph).

386 Driving
06/09/13 17:52:31 32SWA600_392

Towing a Trailer

Driving Safely With a Trailer Towing Speeds and Gears Making Turns and Braking
The added weight, length, and Drive slower than normal in all Make turns more slowly and wider
height of a trailer will affect your driving situations, and obey posted than normal. The trailer tracks a
vehicle’s handling and performance, speed limits for vehicles with trailers. smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
so driving with a trailer requires can hit or run over something the
some special driving skills and If your vehicle has an automatic vehicle misses. Allow more time and
techniques. transmission, use the D position distance for braking. Do not brake or
when towing a trailer on level roads. turn suddenly as this could cause the
For your safety and the safety of D3 is the proper shift lever position trailer to jackknife or turn over.
others, take time to practice driving to use when towing a trailer in hilly
manoeuvres before heading for the terrain.
open road, and follow the guidelines
in this section. Do not exceed the limited speed
when towing a trailer. At higher
speeds, the trailer may sway or
affect vehicle handling (see ‘‘Driving
on Hills’’ in the next page for
additional gear information).

CONTINUED

Driving 387
06/09/13 17:52:40 32SWA600_393

Towing a Trailer

Driving on Hills Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
When climbing hills, closely watch remember, it will take longer to slow Crosswinds and air turbulence
your temperature gauge. If it nears down and stop when towing a trailer. caused by passing trucks can disrupt
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air your steering and cause the trailer to
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if Driving on an uphill road of more sway. When being passed by a large
necessary, pull to the side of the than 12% slope is not recommended vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
road to let the engine cool. for your vehicle. steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
When driving down hills, reduce We recommend that you tow a corrections.
your speed and always apply engine trailer on the roads recommended by
braking by shifting down. If your the trailer association.
vehicle has a manual transmission,
when going down a steep hill, use If you must stop when facing uphill,
the 3rd gear to provide greater use the foot brake or parking brake.
engine braking. Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
If your vehicle has an automatic as this can cause the automatic
transmission, when driving down transmission to overheat.
hills, reduce your speed and use the
D3 position. When going down a Make sure to set the parking brake
steep hill, use the 2nd position to when starting off on an incline.
provide greater engine braking.

388 Driving
06/09/13 17:52:45 32SWA600_394

Towing a Trailer

Backing Up On Diesel models only


Always drive slowly and have You should keep the engine idling
someone guide you when backing up. for about 2 minutes before turning
Grip the bottom of the steering off the ignition switch. (Idling the
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left engine is prohibited in some
to get the trailer to move to the left, countries. Always follow the legal
and turn the wheel right to move the requirements of the countries in
trailer to the right. which you will drive.)

Parking
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in first or reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tyres.

Driving 389
06/09/13 17:52:54 32SWA600_395

Trailer Stability Assist

Your vehicle is equipped with trailer Under these conditions, trailer Trailer stability assist cannot prevent
stability assist function. This stability assist begins to stabilize the a loss of control. Always reduce the
function works on the same sensors vehicle/trailer combination by vehicle speed and steer firmly. Do
as the vehicle stability assist (VSA) reducing the vehicle speed. The not brake suddenly or make quick
system. This function helps to control unit sends signals to steering motion. It could cause the
stabilize the vehicle/trailer selectively apply the brakes and trailer to jackknife or turn over and
combination when the trailer regulate the engine output. The the system becomes ineffective.
severely sways or oscillates. For brake lights of your vehicle will be
more information of the VSA system, turned on automatically by the Trailer stability assist cannot prevent
see page 378 . system even if you do not keep the swaying that can occur in crosswinds
pressure on the brake pedal. and in normal and emergency
If the function detects the vehicle/ driving manoeuvres. It helps only to
trailer instability, it checks if the When the brakes are applied, the stabilize the vehicle/trailer
swaying is caused by the trailer, and trailer’s brake lights come on along combination in these conditions,
if the trailer swaying or oscillation is with the vehicle brake lights. after the oscillation becomes severe.
increasing.
When the trailer stability assist Trailer stability assist will also be
The vehicle/trailer combination is activates, you will see the VSA ineffective while driving at high
more affected by crosswinds, activation indicator blink. There may speed or towing a trailer with a high
buffeting, and improper tongue load. also be some noise from the VSA centre of gravity.
These conditions can make the hydraulic system.
trailer unstable, and cause it to sway. Always obey the speed limits for
towing a trailer, see page 386 .

390 Driving
06/09/13 17:53:02 32SWA600_396

Trailer Stability Assist

Trailer Stability Assist Failure If there is a problem with the VSA


Trailer Stability Assist system, the VSA system and trailer
Function Indicator stability assist function shut off. The
On vehicles with information display VSA system and VSA activation
The control unit monitors the VSA indicators also come on (see page
circuitry and the braking system. If 378 ).
there is a problem with the brake
lighting system, the trailer stability
assist function shuts down and the
trailer stability assist (TSA TM)
function indicator comes on and
stays on in the instrument panel.

If you see this indicator, have your On vehicles with multi-information


vehicle checked at your dealer as display
soon as possible. The control unit monitors the VSA
circuitry and the braking system. If
In this case, your vehicle still has the there is a problem with the brake
VSA traction and stability lighting system, the trailer stability
enhancement, but it will not have the assist function shuts down, and the
trailer stability assist function. symbol ‘‘TSA TM’’ or this symbol with
a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display.

CONTINUED

Driving 391
06/09/13 17:53:08 32SWA600_397

Trailer Stability Assist

If you see this message, have your On all models The function turns on every time you
vehicle checked at your dealer as The ABS indicator and the brake start the engine along with the VSA,
soon as possible. system indicator may also come on even if you turned it off the last time
along with the VSA system indicator. you drove the vehicle.
In this case, your vehicle still has the
VSA traction and stability If you see these warning indicators,
enhancement, but it will not have the have your vehicle checked at your
trailer stability assist function. dealer as soon as possible.

If there is a problem with the VSA If you turn off the VSA, the trailer
system, the VSA system and trailer stability assist function also shuts off.
stability assist function shut off, and Press and hold the VSA off switch
a symbol ‘‘VSA’’ or this symbol with until you hear a beep (see page 379 ).
a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message and The VSA activation indicator comes
then a symbol ‘‘TSA TM’’ or this on as a reminder. Press and hold the
symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ switch again to turn the system on.
message appear on the multi-
information display. The VSA system
and VSA activation indicators also
come on (see page 378 ).

392 Driving
06/09/13 17:53:15 32SWA600_398

Off-Road Guidelines

General Information In many countries, the law prohibits


Your vehicle has been designed off-road driving, e.g. driving in
primarily for use on paved roads. But forests, trailblazing, etc. Please Improperly operating this
its higher ground clearance allows check your local laws and vehicle on or off pavement
you to occasionally travel on unpaved regulations before commencing any can cause an accident or
roads, such as campgrounds, picnic off-road driving activity. rollover in which you and
sites, and similar locations. It is not your passengers could be
designed for trail-blazing, mountain seriously injured or killed.
climbing, or other challenging off-
road activities. Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
If you decide to drive on unpaved manual.
roads, you will find that it requires Keep your speed low, and
somewhat different driving skills. don’t drive faster than
Your vehicle will also handle conditions permit.
somewhat differently than it does on
paved roads. So be sure to read this
owner’s manual, pay special attention
to the precautions and tips in this
section, and get acquainted with
your vehicle before you leave the
paved roads.

Driving 393
06/09/13 17:53:26 32SWA600_399

Off-Road Guidelines

Important Safety Precautions Check Out Your Vehicle Accelerating and Braking
To avoid loss of control or rollover, Before you leave the paved road, be For better traction on all surfaces,
be sure to follow all precautions and sure to do all scheduled maintenance accelerate slowly and gradually build
recommendations. and service, and inspect your vehicle up speed. If you try to start too fast
for any problems. Pay special on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
Be sure to store luggage properly, attention to the condition of the tyres, might not have enough traction to
and do not exceed your vehicle and check the tyre pressures. get underway, and you may dig
luggage load limits (see pages yourself a hole. Starting with the
344 and 527 ). After you return to the paved road, shift lever in second (2) gear will
carefully inspect your vehicle to help you have a smoother start on
Whenever you drive, make sure make sure there is no damage that snow or ice.
you and your passengers always could make driving it unsafe.
wear seat belts. Recheck the condition of the tyres Keep in mind that you will usually
and the tyre pressures. need more time and distance to
Keep your speed low, and never brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
go faster than the conditions allow. Remember Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
The route presents limits (too steep the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
It’s up to you to continually assess or bumpy roads). You have limits system pump them for you.
the situation and drive within the (driving skill and comfort). And your
limits. vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).

Driving off-road can be hazardous if


you fail to recognize limits and take
the proper precautions.

394 Driving
06/09/13 17:53:36 32SWA600_400

Off-Road Guidelines

Avoiding Obstacles Crossing a Stream If You Get Stuck


Debris in the road can damage your Avoid driving through deep water. If Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,
suspension or other components. you encounter water in your route (a or other surfaces where you could
Because your vehicle has a high small stream or large puddle, for get stuck. If you do happen to get
centre of gravity, driving over a large example), evaluate it carefully before stuck because of inclement weather
obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, or other conditions, choose a safe
into a deep hole can cause your flowing slowly, and has firm ground and appropriate course of action.
vehicle to tip or roll over. underneath. If you are not sure of
the depth or the ground, turn around You should never use a jack to try
Driving on Slopes and find another route. getting unstuck. A jack only works
If you can’t clearly see all conditions on firm, level ground. Also, your
or obstacles on a slope, walk the Driving through deep water can also vehicle could easily slip off the jack
slope before you drive on it. If you damage your vehicle. The water can and hurt you or someone else.
have any doubt whether or not you get into the transmission and
can safely drive on the slope, don’t differential, diluting the lubricant
do it. Find another route. and causing an eventual failure. It
can also wash the grease out of the
If you are driving up a hill and find wheel bearings.
that you cannot continue, do not try to
turn around. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.

CONTINUED

Driving 395
06/09/13 17:53:40 32SWA600_401

Off-Road Guidelines

If you spin the wheels excessively


trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat the components of the
4-wheel drive system. If this happens,
the 4-wheel drive system shuts off
and only the front wheels receive
power. If this happens, stop and
allow everything to cool down. The
4-wheel drive system will work again
after its temperature drops.

If you slip the clutch for a long time


while trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat and damage it.

396 Driving
06/09/13 17:53:44 32SWA600_402

Maintenance

Regularly maintaining your vehicle is Maintenance Safety ....................... 398 Wiper Blades .................................. 446
the best way to protect your invest- Maintenance Schedule .................. 399 Tyres ............................................... 450
ment. You will be rewarded with Maintenance Record ..................... 407 Checking the Battery .................... 457
safer, more economical, trouble-free Fluid Locations............................... 408 Vehicle Storage .............................. 459
driving. This section lists items that Adding Engine Oil
need to be checked regularly and (Petrol models) .......................... 410
explains how to check them. It also Adding Engine Oil
details some simple maintenance (Diesel models).......................... 412
tasks you can do yourself. The Engine Coolant
maintenance schedules show you (Petrol models) .......................... 414
when these things need to be done. Engine Coolant
(Diesel models).......................... 416
Windscreen Washers .................... 418
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 419
Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 420
Rear Differential Fluid .................. 421
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 421
Power Steering Fluid..................... 423
Air Cleaner Element
(Petrol models) .......................... 424
Air Cleaner Element
(Diesel models).......................... 425
Fuel Filter ....................................... 426
Lights .............................................. 427
Air Conditioning System ............... 443
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 444

Maintenance 397
06/09/13 17:53:54 32SWA600_403

Maintenance Safety

All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
technician. vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you
To eliminate potential hazards, read can be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection and precautions can cause
and skills required. and maintenance you to be seriously hurt or
Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and killed.
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owner’s
is set, and the engine is off. manual/Service Book. Always follow the
procedures and precautions
To clean parts, use a commercially in this owner’s manual.
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not fuel. Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is Some of the most important safety
To reduce the possibility of fire or adequate ventilation whenever you precautions are given here. However,
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, operate the engine. we cannot warn you of every
and flames away from the battery conceivable hazard that can arise in
and all fuel-related parts. Burns from hot parts. Let the performing maintenance. Only you
engine and exhaust system cool can decide whether or not you
Wear eye protection and down before touching any parts. should perform a given task.
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.

398 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:54:05 32SWA600_404

Maintenance Schedule

The required maintenance schedule The maintenance schedule assumes We recommend the use of genuine
specifies all maintenance required to you will use your vehicle as normal Honda parts and fluids or their
keep your vehicle in peak operating transportation for passengers and equivalent whenever you have
condition. Maintenance work should their possessions. You should also maintenance done. These are the
be performed in accordance with the follow these recommendations: same high-quality items that went
standards and specifications of into your vehicle when it was new, so
Honda by properly trained and Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s you can be sure they fit and perform
equipped technicians. Your load limit. This puts excess stress flawlessly.
authorized dealer meets all of these on the engine, brakes, and many
requirements. other vehicle parts.

There are two types of maintenance Operate your vehicle on On Diesel models
schedule in this owner’s manual. One reasonable roads within the legal Do not press the engine cover
is for petrol models (see pages 401 to speed limit. forcibly. This may damage the
403 ), and the other is for diesel engine cover and component parts.
models (see pages 404 − 406 ). Drive your vehicle regularly over a
distance of several kilometres
In EU countries, follow the (miles).
maintenance schedule in the Service
Book that came with your vehicle. On Petrol models
Always use the recommended
petrol only (see page 332 ).

On Diesel models
Always use the recommended
diesel fuel only (see page 332 ).

Maintenance 399
06/09/13 17:54:20 32SWA600_405

Maintenance Schedule

Owner’s Maintenance Checks Windscreen wipers − Check the Battery − Check its condition and
You should check the following wiper condition monthly. If the the terminals for corrosion
items at the use or specified intervals. wipers do not wipe the windscreen monthly. See page 457 .
securely, check them for wear,
Engine oil level − Check every cracks, and other damage. Air conditioning system − Check
time you fill the fuel tank. See its operation weekly. See page 443 .
page 336 . Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page Windscreen demister − Operate
Engine coolant level − 419 . the heater and air conditioning
On Petrol models and check the demister vents
Check the radiator reserve tank Brakes and clutch − Check the monthly.
every time you fill the fuel tank. fluid level monthly. See page 421 .
See page 338 . Lights − Check the operation of
Brake pedal − Check the brake the headlights, position lights, tail-
On Diesel models pedal for smooth operation. lights, high-mount brake light, and
Check the expansion tank every licence plate lights monthly. See
time you fill the fuel tank. See Parking brake − Check the page 427 .
page 338 . parking brake lever for smooth
operation. Doors − Check the tailgate and
Windscreen washer fluid − Check all doors including the rear doors
the level in the reservoir monthly. Tyres − Check the tyre pressure for smooth opening/closing and
If weather conditions cause you to monthly. Examine the tread for secure locking.
use the washers frequently, check wear and foreign objects. See page
the reservoir each time you stop 450 . Horn − Check the horn operation.
for fuel. See page 418 .

400 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:54:37 32SWA600_406

Maintenance Schedule for Petrol Models (Except EU)


Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 This maintenance schedule
or time − whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0 outlines the minimum required
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
maintenance that you should
Replace engine oil*1 Normal Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year
perform to ensure the trouble-

M A I N T E N A N C E
Severe*2 Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months
Replace engine oil filter*1 Normal
free operation of your vehicle.
Severe*2 Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months Due to regional and climatic
Clean air cleaner element (Dry type only) Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) differences, some additional
Replace air cleaner element (Wet and dry types) Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) servicing may be required.
Inspect valve clearance Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) Please consult your warranty
Replace fuel filter*3
booklet for a more detailed
Replace spark plugs Iridium type Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
Inspect drive belt
description.
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant At 200,000 km (125,000 miles) or 10 years, then
every 100,000 km (62,500 miles) or 5 years

*1 : Only severe schedule is required in some countries: refer to the local warranty booklet that came with your vehicle.
*2 : Refer to page 403 for replacement information under severe conditions.

S C H E D U L E
*3 : Refer to page 426 for replacement information under severe driving conditions.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 401
06/11/14 17:46:54 32SWA600_407

Maintenance Schedule for Petrol Models (Except EU)


Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
or time − whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Replace transmission fluid*1 M/T Normal
S C H E D U L E

Severe
A/T Normal
Severe
Replace rear differential fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of distance)
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Check expiry date for TRK bottle (if equipped)
Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition at Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
least once per month)
M A I N T E N A N C E

Visually inspect the following items:


Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots
Suspension components Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections

*1: Refer to page 403 for replacement information under severe conditions.

402 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:55:00 32SWA600_408

Maintenance Schedule for Petrol Models (Except EU)

NOTE:
If you drive your vehicle under one or more of the following severe

M A I N T E N A N C E
conditions, the following items must be serviced according to the
maintenance schedule indicated as Severe.

Severe driving conditions:


A: Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip, or in freezing temperatures,
driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.
B: Driving in extremely hot [over 35°C (95°F)] conditions.
C: Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
D:Trailer towing, driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving in mountainous
conditions.
E: Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

Items Condition

S C H E D U L E
Engine oil and oil filter A, B, C, D, E

Transmission fluid B, D
(M/T, A/T)

Maintenance 403
06/11/14 17:47:07 32SWA600_409

Maintenance Schedule for Diesel Models (Except EU)


Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 This maintenance schedule
or time − whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0 outlines the minimum required
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 maintenance that you should
Replace engine oil and oil filter*1 Normal Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year
perform to ensure the trouble-
S C H E D U L E

Severe Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months


Replace air cleaner element*1 (Wet type) Normal Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles)
free operation of your vehicle.
Severe Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) Due to regional and climatic
Replace fuel filter differences, some additional
Inspect drive belt servicing may be required.
Replace engine coolant Please consult your warranty
Replace transmission fluid*1 M/T Normal
booklet for a more detailed
Severe
Replace rear differential fluid
description.
Inspect front and rear brakes Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
M A I N T E N A N C E

*1: Refer to page 406 for replacement information under severe conditions.

404 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:55:27 32SWA600_410

Maintenance Schedule for Diesel Models (Except EU)


Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
or time − whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of distance)

M A I N T E N A N C E
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Check expiry date for TRK bottle (if equipped)
Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition at Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots
Suspension components Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections

*1 : Refer to page 406 for replacement information under severe conditions.

S C H E D U L E
CONTINUED

Maintenance 405
06/09/13 17:55:35 32SWA600_411

Maintenance Schedule for Diesel Models (Except EU)

NOTE:
If you drive your vehicle under one or more of the following severe
conditions, the following items must be serviced according to the
S C H E D U L E

maintenance schedule indicated as Severe.

Severe driving conditions:


A: Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip, or in freezing temperatures,
driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.
B: Driving in extremely hot (over 35°C) conditions.
C: Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
D:Trailer towing, driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving in mountainous
conditions.
M A I N T E N A N C E

E: Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

Items Condition

Engine oil and oil filter A, B, C, D, E

Air cleaner element D, E

Manual transmission B, D
fluid

406 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:55:42 32SWA600_412

Maintenance Record (Except EU)

Have your servicing dealer record all required maintenance below. Keep receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

20,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 120,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
12,500 Mi. 75,000 Mi.
(or 12 Mo.) (or 72 Mo.)
Date Date

40,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 140,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
25,000 Mi. 87,500 Mi.
(or 24 Mo.) (or 84 Mo.)
Date Date

60,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 160,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
37,500 Mi. 100,000 Mi.
(or 36 Mo.) (or 96 Mo.)
Date Date

80,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 180,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
50,000 Mi. 112,500 Mi.
(or 48 Mo.) (or 108 Mo.)
Date Date

100,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 200,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
62,500 Mi. 125,000 Mi.
(or 60 Mo.) (or 120 Mo.)
Date Date

Maintenance 407
06/09/13 17:55:46 32SWA600_413

Fluid Locations (Petrol models)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP BRAKE FLUID


(Black cap)

CLUTCH FLUID
(Light grey cap)

WASHER FLUID AUTOMATIC


(Blue cap) TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK RADIATOR CAP ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR


(Orange handle)

408 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:55:49 32SWA600_414

Fluid Locations (Diesel models)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP BRAKE FLUID


(Black cap)

EXPANSION CLUTCH FLUID


TANK (Light grey cap)

WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)

POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK


(Orange handle)

Maintenance 409
06/09/13 17:55:55 32SWA600_415

Adding Engine Oil (Petrol models)

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and Recommended Engine Oil
tighten it securely. Let the engine European models
warm up and turn off the engine, let Oil is a major contributor to your
it sit for approximately 3 minutes, engine’s performance and longevity.
then check the oil level on the Always use a premium-grade
engine oil dipstick. Do not fill above detergent oil. It is highly
the upper mark; you could damage recommended that you use genuine
the engine. Honda Motor Oil, ‘‘ACEA A1/B1,’’
‘‘ACEA A3/B3,’’ or ‘‘ACEA A5/B5’’
in your vehicle for as long as you
own it.
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
This oil is formulated to help your
Unscrew and remove the engine oil engine use less fuel.
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in
the oil slowly and carefully so you do
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.

410 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:56:03 32SWA600_416

Adding Engine Oil (Petrol models)

You can select the proper SAE/ Except for European models Always use an API service SL or
ACEA viscosity oil for your vehicle Oil is a major contributor to your higher grade fuel-efficient oil. This
according to this chart: engine’s performance and longevity. oil is formulated to help your engine
Always use a premium-grade deter- use less fuel.
gent oil. It is highly recommended
that you use genuine Honda Motor Engine Oil Additives
Oil in your vehicle for as long as you Your vehicle does not require any oil
own it. additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
You can select the proper SAE performance and durability.
viscosity oil for your vehicle
according to this chart:

Ambient Temperature

Ambient Temperature

CONTINUED

Maintenance 411
06/09/13 17:56:10 32SWA600_417

Adding Engine Oil (Diesel models)

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and Recommended Engine Oil
tighten it securely. Let the engine Always use a synthetic motor oil that
warm up and turn off the engine, let meets the ACEA specifications, and
it sit for approximately 3 minutes, is the proper weight as shown in the
then check the oil level on the following chart. When using
engine oil dipstick. Do not fill above synthetic oil, you must follow the oil
the upper mark; you could damage and filter change intervals given in
the engine. the maintenance schedule.

On Vehicles without DPF


It is highly recommended that you
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP use genuine Honda Motor Oil or
0W-30 synthetic motor oil meeting
Unscrew and remove the engine oil the minimum specification: ‘‘ACEA
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in A1/B1,’’ ‘‘ACEA A3/B3,’’ or ‘‘ACEA
the oil slowly and carefully so you do A5/B5.’’
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.

412 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:56:18 32SWA600_418

Adding Engine Oil (Diesel models)

You can select the proper SAE/ On Vehicles with DPF Engine Oil Additives
ACEA viscosity oil for your vehicle It is highly recommended that you Your vehicle does not require any oil
according to this chart: use genuine Honda Motor Oil or additives. Additives may adversely
0W-30 synthetic motor oil meeting affect the engine or transmission
the minimum specification: ‘‘ACEA performance and durability.
C2’’ or ‘‘ACEA C3.’’

You can select the proper SAE/


ACEA viscosity oil for your vehicle
according to this chart:

Ambient Temperature

*NOTE: 0W-30 oil is formulated to


improve fuel economy.

Ambient Temperature

*NOTE: 0W-30 is formulated to


improve fuel economy.

Maintenance 413
06/09/13 17:56:25 32SWA600_419

Engine Coolant (Petrol models)

Adding Engine Coolant The cooling system contains many


If the coolant level in the reserve aluminium components that can
tank is at or below the MIN line, add corrode if an improper antifreeze is
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. used. Some antifreeze, even though
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. labelled as safe for aluminium parts,
may not provide adequate protection.

If the reserve tank is completely


empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.

RESERVE TANK

Always use genuine Honda All Removing the radiator cap


Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. while the engine is hot can
This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 cause the coolant to spray
percent antifreeze and 50 percent out, seriously scalding you.
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water. Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.

414 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:56:34 32SWA600_420

Engine Coolant (Petrol models)

4. The coolant level should be up to


the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly and


carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spills immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.

5. Put the radiator cap back on, and


RADIATOR CAP tighten it fully. RESERVE TANK

1. Make sure the engine and radiator 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
are cool. Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling on the reserve tank.
system by turning the radiator cap
anticlockwise, without pressing Do not add any rust inhibitors or
down. other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
3. Remove the radiator cap by compatible with the coolant or
pushing down and turning engine components.
anticlockwise.

Maintenance 415
06/09/13 17:56:40 32SWA600_421

Engine Coolant (Diesel models)

Adding Engine Coolant Always use genuine Honda All


Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
EXPANSION MAX LINE This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 Removing the expansion
TANK percent antifreeze and 50 percent tank cap while the engine is
water. Never add straight antifreeze hot can cause the coolant to
or plain water. spray out, seriously scalding
you.
The cooling system contains many
aluminium components that can Always let the engine and
corrode if an improper antifreeze is radiator cool down before
used. Some antifreeze, even though removing the expansion tank
labelled as safe for aluminium parts, cap.
MIN LINE may not provide adequate protection.

If the coolant level in the expansion


tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

416 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:56:49 32SWA600_422

Engine Coolant (Diesel models)

5. Put the expansion tank cap back


on, and tighten it fully.
CAP MAX LINE
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.

1. Make sure the engine and radiator 4. The coolant level should be up to
are cool. the MAX line. Add coolant if it is
low.
2. Loosen the expansion tank cap by
turning it 1/8 turn anticlockwise. Pour the coolant slowly and
This will relieve any remaining carefully so you do not spill any.
pressure in the cooling system. Clean up any spills immediately; it
could damage components in the
3. Remove the expansion tank cap by engine compartment.
pushing down and turning
anticlockwise.

Maintenance 417
06/09/13 17:56:56 32SWA600_423

Windscreen Washers

Petrol models LEVEL GAUGE Diesel models LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a


vinegar/water solution in the
windscreen washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s
paint, while a vinegar/water solution
can damage the windscreen washer
pump. Use only commercially-
available windscreen washer fluid.

Check the fluid level in the Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windscreen washer reservoir at least windscreen washer fluid. This
monthly during normal use. increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level When you refill the reservoir, clean
gauge. the edges of the windscreen wiper
blades with windscreen washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.

418 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:57:05 32SWA600_424

Automatic Transmission Fluid

DIPSTICK 4. Remove the dipstick and check


the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.

5. If the level is below the lower


mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
UPPER between the upper and lower
MARK
marks.
LOWER
MARK
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
Check the fluid level with the engine 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) any spills immediately; it could
at normal operating temperature. from the transmission, and wipe it damage components in the engine
with a clean cloth. compartment.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine and let it run until 3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
the radiator fan comes on, then into the transmission securely as
shut off the engine. For accurate shown in the illustration.
results, wait about 60 seconds
before going to step 2, but don’t
wait longer than 90 seconds.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 419
06/09/13 17:57:12 32SWA600_425

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Manual Transmission Fluid

Always use genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid


ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission The transmission should be drained
Fluid). If it is not available, you and refilled with new fluid according
may use a DEXRON III to the time and distance
automatic transmission fluid as a recommendations in the
temporary replacement. However, maintenance schedule.
continued use can affect the shift
quality. Have the transmission Always use genuine Honda Manual
flushed and refilled with genuine Transmission Fluid (MTF). If it is
Honda ATF-Z1 by your dealer as not available, you may use an API
soon as it is convenient. service SJ or higher grade motor oil
with a viscosity of SAE 10W-30 or
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back 10W-40 as a temporary replacement.
into the transmission securely as However, motor oil does not contain
shown in the illustration. the proper additives, and continued
use can cause stiffer shifting.
Make sure the rubber cap on the Replace as soon as it is convenient.
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,


contact your dealer.

420 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:57:23 32SWA600_426

Rear Differential Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

Rear Differential Fluid Brake and Clutch Fluid Brake System


The rear differential should be Check the fluid level in the
drained and refilled with new fluid reservoirs monthly. Petrol models
according to the recommendation of
the maintenance schedule. Have Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
your dealer replace the rear Clutch fluid reservoir
differential fluid. (manual transmission only)

Use genuine Honda Dual Pump Fluid On vehicles with multi-information


only. Do not use automatic display
transmission fluid (ATF). You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’
or this symbol with a ‘‘BRAKE
FLUID LOW’’ message on the multi- MIN MAX
information display when the brake
fluid level is low. The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
Replace the brake fluid according to of the reservoir. If the level is at or
the recommendation in the below the MIN mark, your brake
maintenance schedule. system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
Always use genuine Honda Brake worn brake pads.
Fluid or an equivalent from a sealed
container that is marked DOT3 or
DOT4 only. Brake fluid marked
DOT5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system. CONTINUED

Maintenance 421
06/09/13 17:57:30 32SWA600_427

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Clutch System
Diesel models Petrol models Diesel models MAX

MIN MAX
MAX MIN MIN

The fluid level should be between A low fluid level can indicate a leak
the MIN and MAX marks on the side in the clutch system. Have this
of the reservoir. If it is not, add system inspected as soon as possible.
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.

422 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:57:36 32SWA600_428

Power Steering Fluid

Diesel models only Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so UPPER LEVEL
You should check the fluid level in you do not spill any. Clean up any
the power steering reservoir at least spills immediately; it could damage
once a year. Check the level on the components in the engine
side of the reservoir when the compartment.
engine is cold. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If not, add power
steering fluid to the UPPER LEVEL Using automatic transmission fluid
mark. or another brand of power steering
fluid will damage the system. Use
only genuine Honda Power Steering LOWER LEVEL
Fluid (V, II or S).
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.

Turning the steering wheel to full


left or right lock and holding it there
can damage the power steering
pump.

Maintenance 423
06/09/13 17:57:49 32SWA600_429

Air Cleaner Element (Petrol models)

The air cleaner element should be Replacement


replaced according to the time and
distance recommendations in the AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
maintenance schedule.

Cleaning
On vehicles with dry type air cleaner
element
The air cleaner element should also
be cleaned according to the
maintenance schedule.

Clean the air cleaner element by CLIPS


blowing compressed air through it in
the opposite direction to normal air The air cleaner element is inside the 3. Carefully clean the inside of the
flow. If you do not have access to air cleaner housing in the engine air cleaner housing with a damp
compressed air (such as a service compartment. rag.
station), ask your dealer to do this
service. To replace it: 4. Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
Follow the replacement procedure 1. Unsnap the three hold-down clips
for removal and reinstallation. and remove the air cleaner 5. Reinstall the air cleaner housing
housing cover. cover, and snap the three hold-
down clips back into place.
2. Remove the old air cleaner
element.

424 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:57:59 32SWA600_430

Air Cleaner Element (Diesel models)

The air cleaner element should be Replacement


replaced according to the time and
distance recommendations in the CLIPS
maintenance schedule.

Follow the replacement procedure


for removal and reinstallation.

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

The air cleaner element is inside the 3. Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing in the engine air cleaner housing with a damp
compartment. rag.

To replace it: 4. Place the new air cleaner element


in the air cleaner housing.
1. Unsnap the three holding-clips and
pull up the front of the air cleaner 5. Reinstall the air cleaner housing
housing cover. cover, and snap the three holding-
clips securely.
2. Remove the old air cleaner
element.

Maintenance 425
06/09/19 17:13:51 32SWA600_431

Fuel Filter

The fuel filter should be replaced Draining Water After the vehicle has been stored for
according to the time and distance (Diesel models only) an extended period, the engine may
recommendations in the mainte- You will see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ or not start. If water stays in the fuel
nance schedule. the symbol with a ‘‘WATER IN system, you will see the symbol on
FUEL FILTER’’ message on the the multi-information display or the
On petrol models multi-information display when water water in diesel filter indicator on the
It is recommended to replace the stays in the fuel system. Contact information display when you turn
fuel filter every 40,000 km (25,000 your dealer as soon as possible (see the ignition switch to the ON (II)
miles), or 2 years (except EU), if the page 127 ). position. This may also be caused by
fuel you are using is suspected to be air in the fuel system. In this case,
contaminated. In a high dust On vehicles with information display follow the procedure for Priming
environment, the filter may become The water in diesel filter indicator the Fuel System (see page 461 ).
clogged sooner. will come on to indicate that draining
water is required (see page 85 ).
On all models
Have a qualified technician change
the fuel filter. Since the fuel system
is under pressure, fuel can spray out
and create a hazard if all fuel line
connections are not handled
correctly.

426 Maintenance
06/09/13 17:58:14 32SWA600_432

Lights

Check the operation of your vehicle’s


exterior lights at least once a month. HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT SIDE TURN
A burned out bulb can make the SIGNAL*2
condition of your vehicle unsafe
reducing your vehicle’s visibility and
the ability to signal your intentions to
other drivers.

POSITION
LIGHT FRONT TURN
SIGNAL
LOW BEAM FRONT FOG
HEADLIGHT LIGHT*1

*1 : If equipped
*2 : Bulb replacement should be done by your dealer.
CONTINUED

Maintenance 427
06/09/13 17:58:26 32SWA600_433

Lights

Check t